Part Number Hot Search : 
40N20 74LVC1 P1256 P4KE440 4HC373 LT1931A DTC043TM D1400
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86CM49NG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_F For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2006 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Page 2
TMP86CM49NG
Differences among Products
Differences in Functions
86CH49 ROM RAM DBR(note1) I/O High-current port Interrupt Timer/counter UART SIO I2C Key-on wake-up 10-bit AD converter (note2) Flash Security N.A. 16 Kbytes (Mask) 512 bytes 86CM49 32 Kbytes (Mask) 1 Kbyte 86PM49 32 Kbytes (OTP) 1 Kbyte 86CS49 60 Kbytes (Mask) 2 Kbytes 86FS49 86FS49A 60 Kbytes (Flash) 2 Kbytes 128 bytes (Flash control register contained) 56 pins 13 pins (sink open drain) External: 5 interrupts, Internal: 19 interrupts 16-bit: 2 channels 8-bit: 4 channels 2 channels 2 channels 1 channel 4 channels 16 channels Read protect Read/Write protect
VDD R without pull down resister
without protect diode on the VDD side R without pull down resister
86FS49B
128 bytes (Flash control register not contained)
VDD
Structurer of TEST pin
R RIN
without protect diode on the VDD side R without pull down resister
VDD R RIN
without protect diode on the VDD side R without pull down resister
Emulation chip QFP64P-14140.80A QFP64-P-1414-0.80A LQFP64-P-1010-0.50D SDIP64-P-750-1.78
TMP86C949XB QFP64-P-1414-0.80A LQFP64-P-1010-0.50D
Package
-
Note 1: The products with Flash memory (86FS49, 86FS49A, 86FS49B) contain the Flash control register (FLSCR) at 0FFFH in the DBR area. The products with mask ROM or OTP and the emulation chip do not have the FLSCR register. In these devices, therefore, a program that accesses the FLSCR register cannot function properly (executes differently as in the case of a Flash product). Note 2: In this data sheet,the following pin names and register names have been changed from the data sheet of the old edition. Although the names have been changed, their functions remain the same.
TMP86CM49NG
OLD name P60(AIN00) P61(AIN01) P62(AIN02) P63(AIN03) P64(AIN04) P65(AIN05) P66(AIN06) P67(AIN07) P70(AIN10) P71(AIN11) P72(AIN12) P73(AIN13) P74(AIN14) P75(AIN15) P76(AIN16) P77(AIN17) 0000:AIN00 0001:AIN01 0010:AIN02 0011:AIN03 0100:AIN04 0101:AIN05 0110:AIN06 0111:AIN07 1000:AIN10 1001:AIN11 1010:AIN12 1011:AIN13 1100:AIN14 1101:AIN15 1110:AIN16 1111:AIN17
NEW name P60(AIN0) P61(AIN1) P62(AIN2) P63(AIN3) P64(AIN4) P65(AIN5) P66(AIN6) P67(AIN7) P70(AIN8) P71(AIN9) P72(AIN10) P73(AIN11) P74(AIN12) P75(AIN13) P76(AIN14) P77(AIN15) 0000:AIN0 0001:AIN1 0010:AIN2 0011:AIN3 0100:AIN4 0101:AIN5 0110:AIN6 0111:AIN7 1000:AIN8 1001:AIN9 1010:AIN10 1011:AIN11 1100:AIN12 1101:AIN13 1110:AIN14 1111:AIN15
AD Converter analog input pin name
ADCCR1 register function name
TMP86CM49NG
Differences in Electrical Characteristics
86CH49 86CM49 86PM49
[V] 5.5 4.5 3.6 [V] 5.5 4.5 3.6 (a) 3.0 2.7 2.0 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [MHz] 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 (b) (Note 1) 16 [MHz] (a)
86CS49
[V] 5.5
86FS49
[V] 5.5 (a) 4.5 3.6 3.0 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [MHz] (Note 2) (b) 4.5 3.6 3.0 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034
86FS49A
[V] 5.5 (a) 4.5 3.6 (b) (Note 3) 1.8 1 4.2 8 16 [MHz] 0.030 0.034 3.0 2.7
86FS49B
(a)
Read / Fetch
3.0 2.7 1.8
Operating condition (MCU mode)
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 1.8V to 5.5V (-40 to 85C)
(a) 2.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85C) (b) 1.8V to 2.0V (-20 to 85C)
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-40 to 85C) (b) 3.0V to 3.6V (-40 to 85C)
(a) 3.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85C) (b) 2.7V to 3.0V (-20 to 85C)
[V] 5.5 4.5 (a)
(a) 2.7V to 5.5V (-40 to 85C)
Erase / Program
3.6
-
-
3.0 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [MHz]
-
-
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40C)
[V] 5.5 4.5 (a)
Operating condition (Serial PROM mode)
3.6
-
-
3.0 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 2 4.2 8 16 [MHz]
Operating Current
-
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40C)
Operating current varies with each product. For details, refer to the datasheet (electrical characteristics) of each product. (Note 4)
Note 1: With the 86CS49, the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 C to 85 C when the supply voltage VDD is less than 2.0 V. Note 2: With the 86FS49, the supply voltage VDD is specified as two separate ranges. While the MCU is operating, do not change the supply voltage from range (a) to range (b) or from range (b) to range (a). Note 3: With the 86FS49A, the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 C to 85 C when the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V. Note 4: With the 86FS49A/B, when a program is executing in the Flash memory or when data is being read from the Flash memory, the Flash memory operates in an intermittent manner causing peak currents in the Flash memory momentarily, as shown in Figure. In this case, the supply current IDD (in NORMAL1, NORMAL2 and SLOW1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and MCU current.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) Program counter (PC) I DDP-P
[mA]
n
n+1
n+2
n+3 Momentary Flash current
Max. current Sum of average momentary Typ. current Flash current and MCU current MCU current
Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
TMP86CM49NG
Revision History
Date 2006/5/23 2006/10/25 2007/2/2 2007/6/28 Revision 1 2 3 4 First Release Contents Revised Periodical updating.No change in contents. Contents Revised
Table of Contents
Differences among Products
TMP86CM49NG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9 Program Memory (MaskROM).................................................................................................................. 9 Data Memory (RAM) ............................................................................................................................... 10 Clock Generator...................................................................................................................................... 10 Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 12 Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 13
Single-clock mode Dual-clock mode STOP mode Configuration of timing generator Machine cycle
2.2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 18
STOP mode IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0) SLOW mode
2.3
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... 31 Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. 32 Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. 32 System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 32
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 Interrupt latches (IL23 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 36 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF23 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 37
Note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.3 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3.1 3.3.2 Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 39 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 40
Using PUSH and POP instructions 3.3.2.1
3.2.1 3.2.2
i
3.4
3.3.3 3.4.1 3.4.2
3.3.2.2
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 42 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 42
Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 41
Using data transfer instructions
3.5 3.6 3.7
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5. I/O Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 Port P0 (P07 to P00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P37 to P30) (Large Current Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P4 (P47 to P40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P5 (P54 to P50) (Large Current Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P6 (P67 to P60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P7 (P77 to P70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 52 54 55 56 58 59 62
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1 6.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................ Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) .................................................................................. Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)....................................................................................................... Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................ 66 67 68 68 69
6.3
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
70 70 70 71
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 73 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 73 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 74 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 75 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 75 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2.1 7.2.2
7.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ii
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.1 8.2 8.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 80 External Trigger Timer Mode .................................................................................................................. 82 Event Counter Mode ............................................................................................................................... 84 Window Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 85 Pulse Width Measurement Mode............................................................................................................ 86 Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode ............................................................................. 89
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 95 Event counter mode................................................................................................................................ 97 Window mode ......................................................................................................................................... 97
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) .................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)................................................................. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4).............................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................ 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9
105 106 106 109 111 112 112 115 117
10.3.9.1 10.3.9.2
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 11.2 11.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6) .................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)................................................................. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6).............................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................ 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 11.3.5 11.3.6 11.3.7 11.3.8 11.3.9
125 126 126 129 131 132 132 135 137
11.3.9.1
iii
11.3.9.2
(NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 144 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 144 145 145 145 146 146 147
139 140 142 143 143 144 144 144
12.8.1 12.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
12.9.1 12.9.2 12.9.3 12.9.4 12.9.5 12.9.6
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 154 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 154 155 155 155 156 156 157
149 150 152 153 153 154 154 154
13.8.1 13.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
13.9.1 13.9.2 13.9.3 13.9.4 13.9.5 13.9.6
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.1 14.2 14.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 162 Transfer bit direction ........................................................................................................................... 164
Transmit mode Clock source Shift edge 14.3.1.1 14.3.1.2 14.3.2.1
14.3.1 14.3.2
iv
14.3.3
14.3.2.2 14.3.2.3 14.3.3.1 14.3.3.2 14.3.3.3
Transfer modes................................................................................................................................... 165
Transmit mode Receive mode Transmit/receive mode
Receive mode Transmit/receive mode
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.1 15.2 15.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 180 Transfer bit direction ........................................................................................................................... 182
Transmit mode Receive mode Transmit/receive mode Transmit mode Receive mode Transmit/receive mode Clock source Shift edge 15.3.1.1 15.3.1.2 15.3.2.1 15.3.2.2 15.3.2.3 15.3.3.1 15.3.3.2 15.3.3.3
15.3.1 15.3.2
15.3.3
Transfer modes................................................................................................................................... 183
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Data Format in the I2C Bus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2C Bus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledgement mode specification................................................................................................ 199 Number of transfer bits ....................................................................................................................... 200 Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 200
Clock source Clock synchronization Acknowledgment mode (ACK = "1") Non-acknowledgment mode (ACK = "0") 16.5.1.1 16.5.1.2
195 195 195 196 197
16.5.1 16.5.2 16.5.3
16.6
16.5.4 16.5.5 16.5.6 16.5.7 16.5.8 16.5.9 16.5.10 16.5.11 16.5.12 16.5.13 16.6.1 16.6.2 16.6.3 16.6.4 16.6.5
16.5.3.1 16.5.3.2
Data Transfer of I2C Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Device initialization ............................................................................................................................. 205 Start condition and slave address generation..................................................................................... 205 1-word data transfer............................................................................................................................ 205 Stop condition generation ................................................................................................................... 208 Restart ................................................................................................................................................ 209
When the MST is "1" (Master mode) When the MST is "0" (Slave mode)
Slave address and address recognition mode specification ............................................................... Master/slave selection ........................................................................................................................ Transmitter/receiver selection............................................................................................................. Start/stop condition generation ........................................................................................................... Interrupt service request and cancel................................................................................................... Setting of I2C bus mode ..................................................................................................................... Arbitration lost detection monitor ...................................................................................................... Slave address match detection monitor............................................................................................ GENERAL CALL detection monitor .................................................................................................. Last received bit monitor...................................................................................................................
201 201 201 202 202 203 203 204 204 204
16.6.3.1 16.6.3.2
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
v
17.2 17.3
Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 215 Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 215 Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 216
17.4 17.5 17.6
17.3.1 17.3.2 17.3.3
STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Restrictions for AD Conversion interrupt (INTADC) usage ................................................................. Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... Noise Countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 219 219 219 219
17.6.1 17.6.2 17.6.3 17.6.4
18. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
18.1 18.2 18.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
19. Input/Output Circuit
19.1 19.2 Control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
20. Electrical Characteristics
20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 228 229 230 232 233 234
21. Package Dimensions
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vi
TMP86CM49NG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86CM49NG
Product No. TMP86CM49NG ROM (MaskROM) 32768 bytes RAM 1024 bytes Package SDIP64-P-750-1.78 OTP MCU TMP86PM49NG Emulation Chip TMP86C949XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series - Instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 MHz) 122 s (at 32.768 kHz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 24interrupt sources (External : 5 Internal : 19) 3. Input / Output ports (56 pins) Large current output: 13pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive 4. Watchdog Timer 5. Prescaler - Time base timer - Divider output function 6. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch - Timer, External trigger, Window, Pulse width measurement, Event counter, Programmable pulse generate (PPG) modes 7. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch - Timer, Event counter, Window modes 8. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO), Pulse width modulation (PWM) output,
060116EBP
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C * The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86CM49NG
Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 9. 8-bit UART : 2 ch 10. High-Speed SIO: 2ch 11. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus): 1ch 12. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter - Analog input: 16 ch 13. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch 14. Clock operation Single clock mode Dual clock mode 15. Low power consumption operation STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock stop.) SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock oscillate.) IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts). IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts). SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts). SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. interruput. 16. Wide operation voltage:
4.5 V to 5.5 V at 16MHz /32.768 kHz 2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8 MHz /32.768 kHz 1.8 V to 5.5 V at 4.2MHz /32.768 kHz
Release by
Page 2
TMP86CM49NG
1.2 Pin Assignment
P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (XTIN) P21 (XTOUT) P22
RESET
(STOP/INT5)P20 (INT0) P00 (RXD1) P01 (TXD1) P02 (INT1) P03 (SI1) P04 (SO1) P05 (SCK1) P06 (INT2) P07 VAREF AVDD (AIN0) P60 (AIN1) P61 (AIN2) P62 (AIN3) P63 (STOP0/AIN4) P64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
P54 P53 P52 P51 (SDA) P50 (SCL) P17 (TC6/PDO6/PWM6/PPG6) P16 (TC5/PDO5/PWM5) P15 (TC2/INT3) P14 (TC4/PDO4/PWM4/PPG4) P13 (TC3/PDO3/PWM3) P12 (PPG) P11 (DVO) P10 (TC1) P47 P46 (SCK2) P45 (SO2) P44 (SI2) P43 P42 (TXD2) P41 (RXD2) P40 P77 (AIN15) P76 (AIN14) P75 (AIN13) P74 (AIN12) P73 (AIN11) P72 (AIN10) P71 (AIN9) P70 (AIN8) P67 (AIN7/STOP3) P66 (AIN6/STOP2) P65 (AIN5/STOP1)
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86CM49NG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86CM49NG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/3)
Pin Name P07 INT2 P06
SCK1
Pin Number 25
Input/Output IO I IO IO IO O IO I IO I IO O IO I IO I IO I O IO I O IO I I IO I O IO I O IO O IO O IO I IO O PORT07 External interrupt 2 input
Functions
24
PORT06 Serial clock input/output 1 PORT05 Serial data output 1 PORT04 Serial data input 1 PORT03 External interrupt 1 input PORT02 UART data output 1 PORT01 UART data input 1 PORT00 External interrupt 0 input PORT17 TC6 input PDO6/PWM6/PPG6 output PORT16 TC5 input PDO5/PWM5 output PORT15 TC2 input External interrupt 3 input PORT14 TC4 input PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output PORT13 TC3 input PDO3/PWM3 output PORT12 PPG output PORT11 Divider Output PORT10 TC1 input PORT22 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT21 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT20 External interrupt 5 input STOP mode release signal input
P05 SO1 P04 SI1 P03 INT1 P02 TXD1 P01 RXD1 P00
INT0
23
22
21
20
19
18
P17 TC6
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6
59
P16 TC5
PDO5/PWM5
58
P15 TC2 INT3 P14 TC4
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
57
56
P13 TC3
PDO3/PWM3
55
P12
PPG
54
P11
DVO
53
P10 TC1 P22 XTOUT
52
15
P21 XTIN P20
INT5 STOP
14
IO I IO I I
17
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86CM49NG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/3)
Pin Name P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 P47 P46
SCK2
Pin Number 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 51 50
Input/Output IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO O IO I IO IO O IO I IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I IO I PORT37 PORT36 PORT35 PORT34 PORT33 PORT32 PORT31 PORT30 PORT47
Functions
PORT46 Serial clock input/output 2 PORT45 Serial data output 2 PORT44 Serial data input 2 PORT43 PORT42 UART data output 2 PORT41 UART data input 2 PORT40 PORT54 PORT53 PORT52 PORT51 I2C bus data PORT50 I2C bus clock PORT67 Analog Input7 STOP3 input PORT66 Analog Input6 STOP2 input PORT65 Analog Input5 STOP1 input PORT64 Analog Input4 STOP0 input PORT63 Analog Input3 PORT62 Analog Input2
P45 SO2 P44 SI2 P43 P42 TXD2 P41 RXD2 P40 P54 P53 P52 P51 SDA P50 SCL P67 AIN7 STOP3 P66 AIN6 STOP2 P65 AIN5 STOP1 P64 AIN4 STOP0 P63 AIN3 P62 AIN2
49
48 47 46
45 44 64 63 62 61
60
35
34
33
32
31
30
Page 6
TMP86CM49NG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/3)
Pin Name P61 AIN1 P60 AIN0 P77 AIN15 P76 AIN14 P75 AIN13 P74 AIN12 P73 AIN11 P72 AIN10 P71 AIN9 P70 AIN8 XIN XOUT
RESET
Pin Number 29
Input/Output IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I I O I I I IO I I PORT61 Analog Input1 PORT60 Analog Input0 PORT77 Analog Input15 PORT76 Analog Input14 PORT75 Analog Input13 PORT74 Analog Input12 PORT73 Analog Input11 PORT72 Analog Input10 PORT71 Analog Input9 PORT70 Analog Input8
Functions
28
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36 10 11 16 12 26 27 13 9
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low. Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion Analog Power Supply Power Supply 0(GND)
TEST VAREF AVDD VDD VSS
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86CM49NG
Page 8
TMP86CM49NG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller. This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86CM49NG memory is composed MaskROM, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the memory address map.
TMP86CM49NG
0000H
SFR
003FH 0040H
64 bytes
SFR:
RAM
043FH 0F80H
1024 bytes
RAM:
Special function register includes: I/O ports Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers System control registers Program status word Random access memory includes: Data memory Stack
DBR:
DBR
0FFFH 8000H
128 bytes
Data buffer register includes: Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers
MaskROM:
Program memory
MaskROM
FFB0H FFBFH FFC0H FFDFH FFE0H FFFFH
32768 bytes
Vector table for interrupts (16 bytes) Vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map 2.1.2 Program Memory (MaskROM)
The TMP86CM49NG has a 32768 bytes (Address 8000H to FFFFH) of program memory (MaskROM ).
Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86CM49NG has 1024bytes (Address 0040H to 043FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes (0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to "00H". (TMP86CM49NG)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD INC DEC JRS HL, 0040H A, H BC, 03FFH (HL), A HL BC F, SRAMCLR ; Start address setup ; Initial value (00H) setup
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register Clock generator
XIN fc TBTCR 0036H
High-frequency clock oscillator
XOUT XTIN
Timing generator
fs
Standby controller
0038H SYSCR1 0039H SYSCR2
Low-frequency clock oscillator
XTOUT
System clocks Clock generator control
System control registers
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control 2.2.1 Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 10
TMP86CM49NG
High-frequency clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT (Open) XTIN
Low-frequency clock XTOUT XTIN XTOUT (Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic resonator
(b) External oscillator
(c) Crystal
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
2.2.2
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions. 1. Generation of main system clock 2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses 3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2 and TBTCR, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to "0".
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
SYSCK DV7CK
Machine cycle counters
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs
12
fc/4
S A 123456 B Y
Divider
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 S B0 B1 A0 Y0 A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Warm-up controller
Watchdog timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP86CM49NG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 DV7CK 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DV7CK
Selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider
0: fc/28 [Hz] 1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to "1". Note 2: Do not set "1" on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock. The minimum instruction execution unit is called an "machine cycle". There are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle 2.2.3 Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode, dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) NORMAL1 mode In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. The TMP86CM49NG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
(2)
IDLE1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock). IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2 = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF (Interrupt master enable flag) is "1" (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When the IMF is "0" (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by SYSCR2 = "1". When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF7 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes. The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) NORMAL2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) SLOW2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2 becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into SLOW1 mode. Do not clear SYSCR2 to "0" during SLOW2 mode. (3) SLOW1 mode This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 14
TMP86CM49NG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by SYSCR2. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) IDLE2 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode. (5) SLEEP1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode. In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) SLEEP2 mode The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock. (7) SLEEP0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by setting "1" on bit SYSCR2. When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF7 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode. STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP mode start instruction.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
IDLE0 mode
Reset release
RESET
IDLE1 mode (a) Single-clock mode
Note 2 SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" NORMAL1 mode Interrupt STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "0" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" STOP SYSCR2 = "1" SLOW2 mode Interrupt SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "0" SLOW1 mode SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" SLEEP0 mode
IDLE2 mode
Interrupt
NORMAL2 mode
SYSCR2 = "0" SLEEP2 mode
SLEEP1 mode (b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR2 = "1" Interrupt Note 2
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP. Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator Operating Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core TBT Other Peripherals Reset Operate 4/fc [s] Machine Cycle Time
RESET NORMAL1 Single clock IDLE1 IDLE0 STOP NORMAL2 IDLE2 SLOW2 Dual clock SLEEP2 SLOW1 SLEEP1 SLEEP0 STOP Stop Stop Oscillation Stop Oscillation
Reset Operate Stop Halt
Reset
Operate
Halt Operate with high frequency
Halt
-
4/fc [s]
Oscillation
Halt Operate with low frequency Halt Operate with low frequency Operate
Operate
4/fs [s]
Halt Halt
Halt
-
Page 16
TMP86CM49NG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP RELM RETM OUTEN
STOP mode start Release method for STOP mode Operating mode after STOP mode Port output during STOP mode
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active 1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode) 0: Edge-sensitive release 1: Level-sensitive release 0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode 1: Return to SLOW1 mode 0: High impedance 1: Output kept Return to NORMAL mode Return to SLOW mode 3 x 213/fs 213/fs 3 x 26/fs 26/fs
R/W R/W R/W R/W
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc 216/fc 3 x 214/fc 214/fc
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to "0" when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to "1" when transiting from SLOW mode to STOP mode. Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = "0", input value is fixed to "0"; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1". Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 XTEN 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2
TGHALT
1
0 (Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN XTEN
High-frequency oscillator control Low-frequency oscillator control Main system clock select (Write)/main system clock monitor (Read) CPU and watchdog timer control (IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2) 1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2) 0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active 1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) 0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG 1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG. (Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes) R/W R/W
SYSCK
IDLE
TGHALT
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to "0", XEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "0", or XTEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "1". Note 2: *: Don't care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don't care Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value. Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to "1" simultaneously. Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to "0". Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to "0". Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to "1", be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input (STOP3 to STOP0) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR). The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is started by setting SYSCR1 to "1". During STOP mode, the following status is maintained. 1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before STOP mode was entered. 3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". 4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7]) which started STOP mode. STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the SYSCR1. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP3 to STOP0) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
2.2.4.1
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP3 to STOP0). However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode. Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to "1" and interrupts may be accepted immediately after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = "1") In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP3 to STOP0 pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP3
to STOP0 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP3 to STOP0 input is high. The following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. Testing a port. 2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
LD SSTOPH: TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1). 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2PRD). 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode ; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
Page 18
TMP86CM49NG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5: TEST JRS LD DI SET SINT5: RETI (SYSCR1). 7 (P2PRD). 0 F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B ; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if port P20 is at high ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode. ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode
STOP pin XOUT pin NORMAL operation STOP operation Confirm by program that the STOP pin input is low and start STOP mode.
VIH
Warm up
NORMAL operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware. Always released if the STOP pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted. Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = "0") In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level. Do not use any STOP3 to STOP0 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1), 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
STOP pin XOUT pin
NORMAL operation STOP mode started by the program. STOP operation
VIH
Warm up NORMAL operation
STOP operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 19
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence. 1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the SYSCR1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode. The RESET pin input must also be "H" level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT Return to NORMAL Mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 Return to SLOW Mode 750 250 5.85 1.95
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate value.
Page 20
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 (a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a) n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 21
0 1 (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
a+6
Instruction address a + 4
Instruction execution
Halt
Divider
0
Count up
2
3
TMP86CM49NG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
2.2.4.2
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes. 1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes Reset input No No Interrupt request Yes "0" IMF
Reset
Normal release mode
"1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 22
TMP86CM49NG
* Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode. (1) Normal release mode (IMF = "0") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to "0" by load instructions. (2) Interrupt release mode (IMF = "1") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes will not be started.
Page 23
Main system clock
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Interrupt request a+2 SET (SYSCR2). 4 Operate Halt a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
Watchdog timer
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 Instruction address a + 2 Operate Normal release mode a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Page 24
a+3 Acceptance of interrupt Operate Operate Interrupt release mode
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
TMP86CM49NG
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
TMP86CM49NG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. 1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input No No TBT source clock falling edge Yes TBTCR = "1" Yes TBT interrupt enable Yes No IMF = "1"
Yes
Reset
No
No
(Normal release mode)
Yes (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes start instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 25
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
* Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag of TBT and TBTCR. After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1". IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF*EF7*TBTCR = "0") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1".
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF*EF7*TBTCR = "1") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be started.
Page 26
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 2
Halt
Watchdog timer
Operate
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Main system clock
TBT clock a+3 a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Page 27
Instruction address a + 2 Operate
Normal release mode a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
TBT clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Acceptance of interrupt Operate
Interrupt release mode
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
TMP86CM49NG
Watchdog timer
Halt
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CM49NG
2.2.4.4
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2). The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode First, set SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET (SYSCR2). 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET LD LD LDW DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR SET (TC6CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC6, 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation) RETI : VINTTC6: DW PINTTC6 ; INTTC6 vector table (TC6CR). 3 (EIRE). 2 (SYSCR2). 6 (TC5CR), 43H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 8000H ; SYSCR2 1 ; Sets mode for TC6, 5 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied) ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC6 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC6, 5
Page 28
TMP86CM49NG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode First, set SYSCR2 to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization (Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC6,TC5), clear SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to "0", executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock Low-frequency clock Main system clock SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR CLR (TC6CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC6, 5 ; SYSCR2 0 (Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) RETI : VINTTC6: DW PINTTC6 ; INTTC6 vector table (TC6CR). 3 (EIRE). 2 (SYSCR2). 7 (TC5CR), 63H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG6), 0F8H ; SYSCR2 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation) ; Sets mode for TC6, 5 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC6 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC6, 5
Page 29
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock Turn off
SYSCK
XEN CLR (SYSCR2). 7 SLOW2 mode (a) Switching to the SLOW mode
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 5
NORMAL2 mode
SLOW1 mode
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
Page 30
CLR (SYSCR2). 5 Warm up during SLOW2 mode (b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock
SYSCK
XEN
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 7
TMP86CM49NG
SLOW1 mode
NORMAL2 mode
TMP86CM49NG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86CM49NG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s]. The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz) when power is turned on. Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware Program counter Stack pointer General-purpose registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY) Jump status flag Zero flag Carry flag Half carry flag Sign flag Overflow flag Interrupt master enable flag Interrupt individual enable flags Interrupt latches (JF) (ZF) (CF) (HF) (SF) (VF) (IMF) (EF) (IL) (PC) (SP) Initial Value (FFFEH) Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latches of I/O ports Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control registers 0 RAM Refer to each of control register Not initialized Refer to I/O port circuitry Watchdog timer Enable Prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 On-chip Hardware Initial Value
2.3.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. When the RESET pin is held at "L" level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized. When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset Watchdog timer reset Malfunction reset output circuit Address trap reset System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86CM49NG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1 is set to "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction execution Internal reset
JP a Address trap is occurred
Reset release
Instruction at address r
maximum 24/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address "a" is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1 = "1") space. Note 2: During reset release, reset vector "r" is read out, and an instruction at address "r" is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset 2.3.3 Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section "Watchdog Timer".
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.) - In case of clearing SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 simultaneously to "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "1". The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
Page 32
TMP86CM49NG
Page 33
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86CM49NG
Page 34
TMP86CM49NG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86CM49NG has a total of 24 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 IL10 IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14 IL15 IL16 IL17 IL18 IL19 IL20 IL21 IL22 IL23 Vector Address FFFE FFFC FFFC FFFA FFF8 FFF6 FFF4 FFF2 FFF0 FFEE FFEC FFEA FFE8 FFE6 FFE4 FFE2 FFE0 FFBE FFBC FFBA FFB8 FFB6 FFB4 FFB2 FFB0
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal Internal Internal External Internal External Internal External Internal Internal Internal External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction interrupt) INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
INT0
Enable Condition Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable IMF* EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1 IMF* EF16 = 1 IMF* EF17 = 1 IMF* EF18 = 1 IMF* EF19 = 1 IMF* EF20 = 1 IMF* EF21 = 1 IMF* EF22 = 1 IMF* EF23 = 1
Priority 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
INTTC1 INT1 INTTBT INT2 INTTC4 INTTC3 INTSBI INT3 INTSIO1 INTSIO2 INTADC INTRXD1 INTTXD1 INTTC6 INTTC5 INTRXD2 INTTXD2 INTTC2
INT5
Note 1: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "reset request" after reset is cancelled). For details, see "Address Trap". Note 2: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer". Note 3: If an INTADC interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch IL15 (INTADC) is being accepted, the INTADC interrupt latch may be cleared without the INTADC interrupt being processed. For details, refer to the corresponding notes in the chapter on the AD converter.
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL23 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset. Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86CM49NG
The interrupt latches are located on address 002EH, 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LDW EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL12, IL10 to IL6 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
LD WA, (ILL) ; W ILH, A ILL
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 002CH, 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data, which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again. The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0".
Page 36
TMP86CM49NG
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF23 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF23 to EF4) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI LDW : : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), 1110100010100000B ; IMF 0 ; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 1 Note: IMF should not be set.
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL; _DI(); EIRL = 10100000B; : _EI(); /* 3AH shows EIRL address */
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86CM49NG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 00000000 000000**) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 IL15 14 IL14 13 IL13 12 IL12 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 IL7 6 IL6 5 IL5 4 IL4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: 00000000) ILE (002EH) 7 IL23 6 IL22 5 IL21 4 IL20 3 IL19 2 IL18 1 IL17 0 IL16
ILE (002EH)
IL23 to IL2
Interrupt latches
at RD 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request
at WR 0: Clears the interrupt request 1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 00000000 0000***0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 EF15 14 EF14 13 EF13 12 EF12 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 EF7 6 EF6 5 EF5 4 EF4 EIRL (003AH) 3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
(Initial value: 00000000) EIRE (002CH) 7 EF23 6 EF22 5 EF21 4 EF20 3 EF19 2 EF18 1 EF17 0 EF16
EIRE (002CH)
EF23 to EF4 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to "1" at the same time. Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 38
TMP86CM49NG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
1-machine cycle
Interrupt service task
Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL)
IMF Execute instruction a-1 Execute instruction Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
PC
a
a+1
a
b
b+1 b+2 b + 3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2
n-3
n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Vector table address
Entry address Interrupt service program
FFF0H FFF1H
03H D2H
Vector
D203H D204H
0FH 06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
Page 39
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP86CM49NG
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSW At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSW At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSW At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.2 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Page 40
TMP86CM49NG
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; RETURN
Main task Interrupt acceptance Interrupt service task Saving registers
Restoring registers Interrupt return Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.3.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return 1. Program counter (PC) and program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack. 2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx: POP LD PUSH WA WA, Return Address WA ; Recover SP by 2 ; ; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing) RETN ; RETURN
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW) TMP86CM49NG
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt (In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx: INC INC INC SP SP SP ; Recover SP by 3 ; ;
(interrupt processing) LD JP EIRL, data Restart Address ; Set IMF to "1" or clear it to "0" ; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example 2). Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
3.5 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (SWI) does.
3.6 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
Page 42
TMP86CM49NG
3.7 External Interrupts
The TMP86CM49NG has 5 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT3. The INT0/P00 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P00 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Source Pin Enable Conditions Release Edge Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
INT0
INT0
IMF
EF4
INT0EN=1
Falling edge
INT1
INT1
IMF
EF6 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT2
INT2
IMF
EF8 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT3
INT3
IMF
EF12 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT5
INT5
IMF
EF23 = 1
Falling edge
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.7 External Interrupts TMP86CM49NG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 00** 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
Noise reject time select P00/INT0 pin configuration INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P00 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P00 should be set to an input mode) 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc.
Page 44
TMP86CM49NG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86CM49NG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F80H to 0FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP86CM49NG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H SIO1SR SIO1RDB TC2CR TC2DRL TC2DRH ADCDR2 ADCDR1 SIO1CR SIO1TDB P0PRD P2PRD P3PRD P4PRD P5PRD TC1DRAL TC1DRAH TC1DRBL TC1DRBH TTREG3 TTREG4 TTREG5 TTREG6 PWREG3 PWREG4 PWREG5 PWREG6 ADCCR1 ADCCR2 Read P0DR P1DR P2DR P3DR P4DR P5DR P6DR P7DR P0OUTCR P1CR P4OUTCR Write
Page 45
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR TMP86CM49NG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read TC1CR TC3CR TC4CR TC5CR TC6CR SIO2RDB EIRE Reserved ILE Reserved Reserved SIO2CR SIO2SR Reserved TBTCR EINTCR SYSCR1 SYSCR2 EIRL EIRH ILL ILH Reserved PSW
Write
SIO2TDB
-
WDTCR1 WDTCR2
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 46
TMP86CM49NG
4.2 DBR
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH 0F90H 0F91H 0F92H 0F93H 0F94H 0F95H 0F96H 0F97H 0F98H 0F99H 0F9AH 0F9BH 0F9CH 0F9DH 0F9EH 0F9FH UART1SR RD1BUF UART2SR RD2BUF P6CR1 P6CR2 P7CR1 P7CR2 STOPCR SBISRB Reserved UART1CR1 UART1CR2 TD1BUF UART2CR1 UART2CR2 TD2BUF SBISRA SBIDBR I2CAR SBICRB Read Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SBICRA Write
Address 0FA0H :: 0FBFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Address 0FC0H :: 0FDFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Address 0FE0H :: 0FFFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program.
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86CM49NG
Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 48
TMP86CM49NG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86CM49NG has 8 parallel input/output ports (56 pins) as follows.
Primary Function Port P0 Port P1 Port P2 Port P3 Port P4 Port P5 Port P6 Port P7 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 5-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port Serial interface input/output and UART input/output. Serial bus interface input/output. Analog input and key-on wakeup input. Analog input. Secondary Functions External interrupt, serial interface input/output, UART input/output. External interrupt, timer counter input/output, divider output. Low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input.
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples. External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program. Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O port.
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Read cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Instruction execution cycle
Example: LD
A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input (a) Input timing Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Write cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Instruction execution cycle
Example: LD
(x), A
Output strobe Old (b) Output timing New
Data output
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 49
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00) TMP86CM49NG
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00)
Port P0 is an 8-bit input/output port. Port P0 is also used as an external interrupt input, a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output. When used as an input port, an external interrupt input, a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output, the corresponding output latch (P0DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P0DR is initialized to "1", and the P0OUTCR is initialized to "0". It can be selected whether output circuit of P0 port is a C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P0OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P0OUTCR is "0". the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P0OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. When used as an input port, an external interrupt input, a serial interface input and an UART input, the corresponding output control (P0OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P0DR is set to "1". P0 port output latch (P0DR) and P0 port terminal input (P0PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P0DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P0PRD register should be read. Table 5-1 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P07 to P00)
Programmed Value Function P0DR Port input, external input, serial interface input or UART input Port "0" output Port "1" output, serial interface output or UART output "1" "0" "1" P0OUTCR "0" Programming for each applications
STOP OUTEN P0OUTCRi P0OUTCRi input Data input (P0PRD) Output latch read (P0DR) Data output (P0DR) Control output Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
D Q D Q
P0i
Output latch
Figure 5-2 Port 0 and P0OUTCR
Page 50
TMP86CM49NG
P0DR (0000H) R/W
7 P07 INT2
6 P06
SCK1
5 P05 SO1
4 P04 SI1
3 P03 INT1
2 P02 TXD1
1 P01 RXD1
0 P00
INT0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P0OUTCR (0008H)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P0OUTCR
Port P0 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
P0PRD (000BH) Read only
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
Page 51
5. I/O Ports
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10) TMP86CM49NG
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit. Port P1 is also used as a timer/counter input/output, an external interrupt input and a divider output. Input/output mode is specified by the P1 control register (P1CR). During reset, the P1CR is initialized to "0" and port P1 becomes an input mode. And the P1DR is initialized to "0". When used as an input port, a timer/counter input and an external interrupt input, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1". When used as a timer/counter output and a divider output, P1DR is set to "1" beforehand and the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1". When P1CR is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P1DR. Table 5-2 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P1DR Port input, timer/counter input or external interrupt input Port "0" output Port "1" output, a timer output or a divider output * "0" "1" P1CR "0" "1" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
STOP OUTEN P1CRi P1CRi input
D Q
Data input (P1DR)
Data output (P1DR) Control output Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
D
Q
P1i
Output latch
Figure 5-3 Port 1 and P1CR
Note: The port set to an input mode reads the terminal input data. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the content of the output latch which is specified as input mode might be changed by executing a bit Manipulation instruction.
Page 52
TMP86CM49NG
7 P1DR (0001H) R/W P17 TC6
PWM6 PDO6 PPG6
6 P16 TC5
PWM5 PDO5
5 P15 TC2 INT3
4 P14 TC4
PWM4 PDO4 PPG4
3 P13 TC3
PWM3 PDO3
2 P12
PPG
1 P11
DVO
0 P10 TC1 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR (0009H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR
I/O control for port P1 (Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Page 53
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20) TMP86CM49NG
5.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port. It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P2DR is initialized to "1". A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports. It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable.
Data input (P20PRD) Data input (P20) Data output (P20) Contorl input Data input (P21PRD) Output latch read (P21) Data output (P21) Data input (P22PRD) Output latch read (P22) Data output (P22)
D Q D Q D Q
P20 (INT5, STOP)
Output latch
Osc. enable P21 (XTIN)
Output latch
P22 (XTOUT)
Output latch STOP OUTEN XTEN fs
Figure 5-4 Port 2
P2DR (0002H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22 XTOUT
1 P21 XTIN
0 P20
INT5 STOP
(Initial value: **** *111)
P2PRD (000CH) Read only
P22
P21
P20
Note: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes high-Z mode.
Page 54
TMP86CM49NG
5.4 Port P3 (P37 to P30) (Large Current Port)
Port P3 is an 8-bit input/output port. When used as an input port, the corresponding output latch (P3DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P3DR is initialized to "1". P3 port output latch (P3DR) and P3 port terminal input (P3PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P3DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P3PRD register should be read.
STOP OUTEN Data input (P3PRD) Output latch read (P3DR) Data output (P3DR)
D Q
P3i
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-5 Port 3
P3DR (0003H) R/W
7 P37
6 P36
5 P35
4 P34
3 P33
2 P32
1 P31
0 P30 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P3PRD (000DH) Read only
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
Page 55
5. I/O Ports
5.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40) TMP86CM49NG
5.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40)
Port P4 is an 8-bit input/output port. Port P4 is also used as a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output. When used as an input port, a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output, the corresponding output latch (P4DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P4DR is initialized to "1", and the P4OUTCR is initialized to "0". It can be selected whether output circuit of P4 port is a C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P4OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P4OUTCR is "0". the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P4OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. When used as an input port, a serial interface input and an UART input, the corresponding output control (P4OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P4DR is set to "1". P4 port output latch (P4DR) and P4 port terminal input (P4PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P4DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P4PRD register should be read. Table 5-3 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P47 to P40)
Programmed Value Function P4DR Port input UART input or serial interface input Port "0" output Port "1" output UART output or serial interface output "1" "0" "1" P4OUTCR "0" Programming for each applications
STOP OUTEN P4OUTCRi P4OUTCRi input Data input (P4PRD) Output latch read (P4DR) Data output (P4DR) Control output Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
D Q D Q
P4i
Output latch
Figure 5-6 Port 4
Page 56
TMP86CM49NG
P4DR (0004H) R/W
7 P47
6 P46
SCK2
5 P45 SO2
4 P44 SI2
3 P43
2 P42 TXD2
1 P41 RXD2
0 P40 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P4OUTCR (000AH)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4OUTCR
Port P4 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
P4PRD (000EH) Read only
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Page 57
5. I/O Ports
5.6 Port P5 (P54 to P50) (Large Current Port) TMP86CM49NG
5.6 Port P5 (P54 to P50) (Large Current Port)
Port P5 is an 5-bit input/output port. Port P5 is also used as an I2C Bus input/output. When used as an input port and I2C Bus input/output, the corresponding output latch (P5DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P5DR is initialized to "1". P5 port output latch (P5DR) and P5 port terminal input (P5PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P5DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P5PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P5, read data of bit 7 to 5 are unstable.
STOP OUTEN Data input (P5PRD) Output latch read (P5DR) Data output (P5DR) Control output Control input
Note: i = 4 to 0
D Q
P5i
Output latch
Figure 5-7 Port 5
P5DR (0005H) R/W
7
6
5
4 P54
3 P53
2 P52
1 P51 SDA
0 P50 SCL (Initial value: ***1 1111)
P5PRD (000FH) Read only
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Page 58
TMP86CM49NG
5.7 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
Port P6 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit. Port P6 is also used as an analog input and key-on wakeup input. Input/output mode is specified by the P6 control register (P6CR1) and P6 input control register (P6CR2). During reset, the P6CR1 is initialized to "0" the P6CR2 is initialized to "1" and port P6 becomes an input mode. And the P6DR is initialized to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "1". When used as an input port , the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of P6CR2 should be set to "1". When used as a key-on wakeup input , the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of STOPkEN should be set to "1". When used as an analog input, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of P6CR2 should be set to "0". When P6CR1 is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P6DR. Table 5-4 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P6DR Port input Key-on wakeup input Analog input Port "0" output Port "1" output * * * "0" "1" P6CR1 "0" "0" "0" "1" "1" P6CR2 "1" * "0" * * STOPkEN * "1" * * *
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-5 Values Read from P6DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P6DR P6CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P6CR2 "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents "0" Terminal input data
Page 59
5. I/O Ports
5.7 Port P6 (P67 to P60) TMP86CM49NG
P6CR2i P6CR2i input P6CR1i P6CR1i input Control input Data input (P6DRi)
D
Q
D
Q
Data output (P6DRi) STOP OUTTEN Analog input AINDS SAIN
D
Q
P6i
a) P63 to P60 Key-on wakeup STOPkEN P6CR2j P6CR2j input P6CR1j P6CR1j input Data input (P6DRj)
D Q D Q
Data output (P6DRj) STOP OUTTEN Analog input AINDS SAIN
D
Q
P6j
b) P67 to P64
Note 1: i = 3 to 0, j = 7 to 4, k = 3 to 0 Note 2: STOP is bit7 in SYSCR1. Note 3: SAIN is AD input select signal. Note 4: STOPkEN is input select signal in a key-on wakeup.
Figure 5-8 Port 6, P6CR1 and P6CR2
Page 60
TMP86CM49NG
P6DR (0006H) R/W
7 P67 AIN7 STOP3
6 P66 AIN6 STOP2
5 P65 AIN5 STOP1
4 P64 AIN4 STOP0
3 P63 AIN3
2 P62 AIN2
1 P61 AIN1
0 P60 AIN0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P6CR1 (0F9BH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P6CR1
I/O control for port P6 (Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P6CR2 (0F9CH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P6CR2
P6 port input control (Specified for each bit)
0: Analog input 1: Port input
R/W
Note 1: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction. Note 2: When used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of P6CR2 to disable the port input. Note 3: Do not set the output mode (P6CR1 = "1") for the pin used as an analog input pin. Note 4: Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion.
Page 61
5. I/O Ports
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70) TMP86CM49NG
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit. Port P7 is also used as an analog input. Input/output mode is specified by the P7 control register (P7CR1) and P7 input control register (P7CR2). During reset, the P7CR1 is initialized to "0" the P7CR2 is initialized to "1" and port P7 becomes an input mode. And the P7DR is initialized to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P7CR1 should be set to "1". When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P7CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of P7CR2 should be set to "1". When used as an analog input, the corresponding bit of P7CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of P7CR2 should be set to "0". When P7CR1 is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P7DR. Table 5-6 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P7DR Port input external interrupt input or key-on wakeup input Analog input Port "0" output Port "1" output * * "0" "1" P7CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P7CR2 "1" "0" * *
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-7 Values Read from P7DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P7DR P7CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P7CR2 "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents "0" Terminal input data
Page 62
TMP86CM49NG
P7CR2i P7CR2i input P7CR1i P7CR1i input Control input Data input (P7DRi)
D
Q
D
Q
Data output (P7DRi) STOP OUTTEN Analog input AINDS SAIN
Note 1: i = 7 to 0 Note 2: STOP is bit7 in SYSCR1. Note 3: SAIN is AD input select signal.
D
Q
P7i
Figure 5-9 Port 7, P7CR1 and P7CR2
P7DR (0007H) R/W
7 P77 AIN15
6 P76 AIN14
5 P75 AIN13
4 P74 AIN12
3 P73 AIN11
2 P72 AIN10
1 P71 AIN9
0 P70 AIN8 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7CR1 (0F9DH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7CR1
I/O control for port P7 (Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P7CR2 (0F9EH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P7CR2
P7 port input control (Specified for each bit)
0: Analog input 1: Port input, external interrupt input or key-on wakeup input
R/W
Note 1: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction. Note 2: When used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of P7CR2 to disable the port input. Note 3: Do not set the output mode (P7CR1 = "1") for the pin used as an analog input pin. Note 4: Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion.
Page 63
5. I/O Ports
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70) TMP86CM49NG
Page 64
TMP86CM49NG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 or fs/2 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/219 or fs/211 fc/217 or fs/29
23 15
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 65
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86CM49NG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 66
TMP86CM49NG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 (ATAS) 4 (ATOUT) 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **11 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 217/fs 215/fs 213/fs 211/fs SLOW1/2 mode 217/fs 215fs 213fs 211/fs
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a don't care is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "6.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable".
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) D2H: Enable assigning address trap area Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 67
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86CM49NG
6.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary counter : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 2.097 524.288 m 131.072 m 32.768 m NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 1 4 1 250 m 62.5 m SLOW mode 4 1 250 m 62.5 m
6.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 043FH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
Page 68
TMP86CM49NG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s] 217/fc Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 69
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86CM49NG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address traps. Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 ATAS 4 ATOUT 3 (WDTEN) 2 (WDTT) 1 0 (WDTOUT) (Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in the internal RAM area Select operation at address trap
0: Generate no address trap 1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to "1", writing the control code D2H to WDTCR2 is required) 0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
ATOUT
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code) 4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
6.3.1
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1 to "0". To enable the WDTCR1 setting, set WDTCR1 and then write D2H to WDTCR2. Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in WDTCR1.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by WDTCR1.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1 is "0", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated. An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including an address trap interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 70
TMP86CM49NG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1 is "1", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
Page 71
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86CM49NG
Page 72
TMP86CM49NG
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT).
7.1 Time Base Timer
7.1.1 Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/216 or fs/28 fc/214 or fs/26 fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
Falling edge detector
IDLE0, SLEEP0 release request
INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 7-1 Time Base Timer configuration 7.1.2 Control
Time Base Timer is controlled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/221 fc/216 fc/2
14
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/213 fs/28 fs/2
6
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/215 fs/213 - - - - - - R/W
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/213 fc/2
12
fs/25 fs/2
4
fc/211 fc/2
9
fs/23 fs/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 73
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer TMP86CM49NG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET (EIRL) . 7 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 ; TBTEN 1 ; IMF 0
Table 7-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1.91 7.63 244.14 976.56 1953.13 3906.25 7812.5 31250 NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 1 1 4 128 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 1 4 - - - - - - SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
7.1.3
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generator which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 7-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 7-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 74
TMP86CM49NG
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
7.2.1
Configuration
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 7-3 Divider Output 7.2.2 Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register. Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22 SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 75
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP86CM49NG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 7-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.953 k 3.906 k 7.813 k 15.625 k DV7CK = 1 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k
Page 76
MCAP1
S INTTC1 interript
A
TC1S
Y
8.1 Configuration
B Start MPPG1 TC1S clear Clear PPG output mode
2
Decoder Set Q
Command start
Pulse width measurement mode
External trigger
External trigger start
Rising
Falling
Edge detector
METT1
TC1 Clear Y Source clock Match CMP 16-bit up-counter
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
Port (Note)
D
Figure 8-1 TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
Pulse width measurement mode S Toggle Q Clear Selector S Q Set Capture TC1DRB TC1DRA 16-bit timer register A, B Toggle Enable Set Clear PPG output mode Internal reset Write to TC1CR TFF1
Page 77
fc/211, fs/23
A
B
fc/27
B
Y
A
fc/23
C
S
2
Window mode Port (Note) pin
ACAP1
TC1CK
TC1CR
TC1 control register
TMP86CM49NG
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.2 TimerCounter Control TMP86CM49NG
8.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 1 is controlled by the TimerCounter 1 control register (TC1CR) and two 16-bit timer registers (TC1DRA and TC1DRB). Timer Register
15 TC1DRA (0011H, 0010H) TC1DRB (0013H, 0012H) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC1DRAH (0011H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC1DRBH (0013H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC1DRAL (0010H) Read/Write TC1DRBL (0012H) Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 1 Control Register
7 TC1CR (0026H) 6 ACAP1 MCAP1 METT1 MPPG1 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF1
TC1S
TC1CK
TC1M
TFF1 ACAP1 MCAP1 METT1 MPPG1
Timer F/F1 control Auto capture control Pulse width measurement mode control External trigger timer mode control PPG output control
0: Clear 0:Auto-capture disable 0:Double edge capture 0:Trigger start 0:Continuous pulse generation Timer 00: Stop and counter clear 01: Command start 10: Rising edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Rising edge count (Event) Positive logic count (Window) 11: Falling edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Falling edge count (Event) Negative logic count (Window) O O
1: Set 1:Auto-capture enable 1:Single edge capture
R/W
R/W 1:Trigger start and stop 1:One-shot Extrigger O - Event O - Window O - Pulse O - PPG O O
TC1S
TC1 start control
-
O
O
O
O
O
R/W
-
O
O
O
O
O
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 TC1CK TC1 source clock select [Hz] 00 01 10 11 TC1 operating mode select fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 External clock (TC1 pin input)
Divider
SLOW, SLEEP mode fs/23 - - R/W
DV9 DV5 DV1
TC1M
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode 01: Window mode 10: Pulse width measurement mode 11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC1DRAH and TC1DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only the lower byte (TC1DRAL and TC1DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register. Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC1CR during TC1S=00. Set the timer F/ F1 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode.
Page 78
TMP86CM49NG
Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes. Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC1DRA > TC1DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC1DRA > 1 (other modes) Note 6: Set TFF1 to "0" in the mode except PPG output mode. Note 7: Set TC1DRB after setting TC1M to the PPG output mode. Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC1S) is cleared to "00" automatically, and the timer stops. After the STOP mode is exited, set the TC1S to use the timer counter again. Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Page 79
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
8.3 Function
TimerCounter 1 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register 1A (TC1DRA) value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC1CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into the timer register 1B (TC1DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time. Table 8-1 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 1 (Example: fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode TC1CK DV7CK = 0 Resolution [s] 00 01 10 128 8.0 0.5 Maximum Time Setting [s] 8.39 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 8.0 0.5 DV7CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 - - Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 - - SLOW, SLEEP mode
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later (fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR = "0")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000000B (TC1CR), 00010000B (EIRL). 5 (TC1DRA), 1E84H ; Sets the timer register (1 s / 211/fc = 1E84H) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1
Example 2 :Auto-capture
LD : LD (TC1CR), 01010000B : WA, (TC1DRB) ; Reads the capture value ; ACAP1 1
Note: Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Page 80
TMP86CM49NG
Timer start Source clock Counter TC1DRA
0 ? 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n
INTTC1 interruput request
Match detect (a) Timer mode
Counter clear
Source clock
Counter
m-2
m-1
m
m+1
m+2
n-1
n
n+1
Capture TC1DRB
? m-1 m m+1 m+2 n-1
Capture
n n+1
ACAP1 (b) Auto-capture
Figure 8-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 81
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
8.3.2
External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising or falling edge is defined in TC1CR. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (trigger start and stop) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request. Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt. After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected. * When TC1CR is set to "0" (trigger start) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA.
Since the TC1 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. The rejection circuit is turned off in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycle or more is required. Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000100B (TC1CR), 00100100B (EIRL). 5 (TC1DRA), 007DH ; 1ms / 27/fc = 7DH ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC1 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000100B (TC1CR), 01110100B (EIRL). 5 (TC1DRA), 01F4H ; 4 ms / 27/fc = 1F4H ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 1
Page 82
TMP86CM49NG
Count start TC1 pin input
Count start
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1 n
0
1
2
3
TC1DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC1 interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT1 = 0)
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start TC1 pin input
Count clear
Count start
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
m-1 m
0
1
2
3
n
0
TC1DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC1 interrupt request
Note: m < n (b) Trigger start and stop (METT1 = 1)
Figure 8-3 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 83
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
8.3.3
Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Either the rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC1CR. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC1DRA is detected at the edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the edge opposite to the selected edge. Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC1 pin. Setting TC1CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB with the auto capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC1 pin Input Up-counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request ?
0 1 2 n-1 n 0 1 2
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
n
Match detect
Counter clear
Figure 8-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 8-2 Input Pulse Width to TC1 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s] NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode High-going Low-going 23/fc 23/fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 23/fs 23/fs
Page 84
TMP86CM49NG
8.3.4
Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC1CR.
Count start Timer start Count stop Count start
TC1 pin input Internal clock Counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request ? 7 Match detect (a) Positive logic (TC1S = 10)
Timer start Count start Count stop Count start
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC1 pin input Internal clock Counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request (b) Negative logic (TC1S = 11) ? 9 Match detect Counter clear 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90 1
Figure 8-5 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 85
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
8.3.5
Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (single-edge capture) Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse width, set the rising edge to TC1CR. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the falling edge to TC1CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. * When TC1CR is set to "0" (double-edge capture) The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC1CR. To measure the cycle starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC1CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC1DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don't care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured value from TC1DRB. Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at "1" until detecting the next edge. Therefore, the second captured value is "1" larger than the captured value immediately after counting starts. Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured value.
Page 86
TMP86CM49NG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz])
CLR LD DI SET EI LD : PINTTC1: CPL JRS LD LD LD RETI SINTTC1: LD LD LD : RETI : VINTTC1: DW PINTTC1 ; INTTC1 Interrupt vector ; Duty calculation A, (TC1DRBL) W,(TC1DRBH) (WIDTH), WA ; Stores cycle in RAM ; Reads TC1DRB (Cycle) (INTTC1SW). 0 F, SINTTC1 A, (TC1DRBL) W,(TC1DRBH) (HPULSE), WA ; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM ; Reads TC1DRB (High-level pulse width) ; INTTC1 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC1 service switch (TC1CR), 00100110B (EIRL). 5 (INTTC1SW). 0 (TC1CR), 00000110B ; INTTC1 service switch initial setting Address set to convert INTTC1SW at each INTTC1 ; Sets the TC1 mode and source clock ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 ; IMF= "1" ; Starts TC1 with an external trigger at MCAP1 = 0
WIDTH HPULSE TC1 pin INTTC1 interrupt request INTTC1SW
Page 87
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Count start TC1 pin input Trigger
Count start (TC1S = "10")
Internal clock Counter TC1DRB INTTC1 interrupt request
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 Capture n 2 3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement (a) Single-edge capture (MCAP1 = "1") Count start Count start (TC1S = "10")
TC1 pin input
Internal clock Counter TC1DRB INTTC1 interrupt request [Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement (2) Duty measurement (b) Double-edge capture (MCAP1 = "0")
0 1 2 3 4 n+1
n
n+1 n+2 n+3 Capture n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1 Capture m
2
Figure 8-6 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 88
TMP86CM49NG
8.3.6
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC1CR specifies either the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin or the command start. TC1CR specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously or not (one-shot pulse). * When TC1CR is set to "0" (Continuous pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation. When TC1S is cleared to "00" during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before the counter stops. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (One-shot pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. TC1CR is cleared to "00" automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC1CR when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin, specify TC1CR to "0" to set the high level to the PPG pin, and "1" to set the low level to the PPG pin. Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to "0".
Note 1: To change TC1DRA or TC1DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may generate a pulse different from that specified. Note 2: Do not change TC1CR during a run of the timer. TC1CR can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC1CR can not be set correctly from this point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting TC1CR specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1, change TC1CR to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG mode. Set TC1CR at this time. Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC1DRA > TC1DRB Note 4: Set TC1DRB after changing the mode of TC1M to the PPG mode.
Page 89
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 s and low-going for 200 s (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD (TC1CR), 10000111B (TC1DRA), 007DH (TC1DRB), 0019H (TC1CR), 10010111B ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc ms = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
Example :After stopping PPG, setting the PPG pin to a high-level to restart PPG (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD : LD LD LD LD (TC1CR), 10000111B (TC1DRA), 007DH (TC1DRB), 0019H (TC1CR), 10010111B : (TC1CR), 10000111B (TC1CR), 10000100B (TC1CR), 00000111B (TC1CR), 00010111B ; Stops the timer ; Sets the timer mode ; Sets the PPG mode, TFF1 = 0 ; Starts the timer ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc s = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch shared with PPG output Data output D R Q
Port output enable PPG pin
Function output TC1CR Write to TC1CR Internal reset Match to TC1DRB Match to TC1DRA Set Clear Toggle Timer F/F1 INTTC1 interrupt request TC1CR clear Q
Figure 8-7 PPG Output
Page 90
TMP86CM49NG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
TC1DRB
n
Match detect TC1DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC1 interrupt request Note: m > n (a) Continuous pulse generation (TC1S = 01)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
n
n+1
m
0
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC1 interrupt request [Application] One-shot pulse output (b) One-shot pulse generation (TC1S = 10) Note: m > n
Figure 8-8 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 91
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Page 92
TMP86CM49NG
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.1 Configuration
TC2S H
Window
TC2 pin
Port (Note)
fc/2 fs/2 fc/213, fs/25 fc/28 fc/23
23, 15
fc fs
A B C D E F S 3 TC2CK
B
Timer/ event counter
Clear
Y A S
Source clock
16-bit up counter
TC2M TC2S TC2CR TC2DR 16-bit timer register 2
CMP Match
INTTC2 interrupt
TC2 control register
Note: When control input/output is used, I/O port setting should be set correctly. For details, refer to the section "I/O ports".
Figure 9-1 Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
Page 93
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.2 Control TMP86CM49NG
9.2 Control
The timer/counter 2 is controlled by a timer/counter 2 control register (TC2CR) and a 16-bit timer register 2 (TC2DR).
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TC2DR (0025H, 0024H)
TC2DRH (0025H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111)
TC2DRL (0024H) R/W
TC2CR (0023H)
7
6
5 TC2S
4
3 TC2CK
2
1
0 TC2M (Initial value: **00 00*0)
TC2S
TC2 start control
0:Stop and counter clear 1:Start NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/213 fc/28 fc/2 - fs
3
R/W SLOW1/2 mode fs/215 fs/25 - - fc (Note7) - SLEEP1/2 mode fs/215 fs/25 - - - - R/W
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/25 fc/28 fc/2 - fs
3
Divider DV21 DV11 DV6 DV1 - -
TC2CK
TC2 source clock select Unit : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
Reserved External clock (TC2 pin input) R/W
TC2M
TC2 operating mode select
0:Timer/event counter mode 1:Window mode
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When writing to the Timer Register 2 (TC2DR), always write to the lower side (TC2DRL) and then the upper side (TC2DRH) in that order. Writing to only the lower side (TC2DRL) or the upper side (TC2DRH) has no effect. Note 3: The timer register 2 (TC2DR) uses the value previously set in it for coincidence detection until data is written to the upper side (TC2DRH) after writing data to the lower side (TC2DRL). Note 4: Set the mode and source clock when the TC2 stops (TC2S = 0). Note 5: Values to be loaded to the timer register must satisfy the following condition. TC2DR > 1 (TC2DR15 to TC2DR11 > 1 at warm up) Note 6: If a read instruction is executed for TC2CR, read data of bit 7, 6 and 1 are unstable. Note 7: The high-frequency clock (fc) canbe selected only when the time mode at SLOW2 mode is selected. Note 8: On entering STOP mode, the TC2 start control (TC2S) is cleared to "0" automatically. So, the timer stops. Once the STOP mode has been released, to start using the timer counter, set TC2S again.
Page 94
TMP86CM49NG
9.3 Function
The timer/counter 2 has three operating modes: timer, event counter and window modes. And if fc or fs is selected as the source clock in timer mode, when switching the timer mode from SLOW1 to NORMAL2, the timer/counter2 can generate warm-up time until the oscillator is stable.
9.3.1
Timer mode
In this mode, the internal clock is used for counting up. The contents of TC2DR are compared with the contents of up counter. If a match is found, a timer/counter 2 interrupt (INTTC2) is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up is resumed after the counter is cleared. When fc is selected for source clock at SLOW2 mode, lower 11-bits of TC2DR are ignored and generated a interrupt by matching upper 5-bits only. Though, in this situation, it is necessary to set TC2DRH only.
Table 9-1 Source Clock (Internal clock) for Timer/Counter2 (at fc = 16 MHz, DV7CK=0)
TC2C K NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode SLOW1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting 18.2 [h] 1.07 [min] - - - - Maximum Time Setting 18.2 [h] 1.07 [min] - - - - SLEEP1/2 mode
Resolution
Maximum Time Setting
Resolution
Maximum Time Setting
Resolution
Resolution
000 001 010 011 100 101
524.29 [ms] 512.0 [ms] 16.0 [ms] 0.5 [ms] - 30.52 [ms]
9.54 [h] 33.55 [s] 1.05 [s] 32.77 [ms] - 2 [s]
1 [s] 0.98 [ms] 16.0 [ms] 0.5 [ms] - 30.52 [ms]
18.2 [h] 1.07 [min] 1.05 [s] 32.77 [ms] - 2 [s]
1 [s] 0.98 [ms] - - 62.5 [ns] -
1 [s] 0.98 [ms] - - - -
Note:When fc is selected as the source clock in timer mode, it is used at warm-up for switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode.
Example :Sets the timer mode with source clock fc/23 [Hz] and generates an interrupt every 25 ms (at fc = 16 MHz )
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC2CR), 00001000B (TC2CR), 00101000B (EIRE). 6 (TC2DR), 061AH ; Sets TC2DR (25 ms 28/fc = 061AH) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC2 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Source clock / mode select ; Starts Timer
Page 95
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Timer start Source clock Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
Match detect
n0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC2DR
INTTC2 interrupt
Figure 9-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 96
TMP86CM49NG
9.3.2
Event counter mode
In this mode, events are counted on the rising edge of the TC2 pin input. The contents of TC2DR are compared with the contents of the up counter. If a match is found, an INTTC2 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up is resumed every the rising edge of the TC2 pin input after the up counter is cleared. Match detect is executed on the falling edge of the TC2 pin. Therefore, an INTTC2 interrupt is generated at the falling edge after the match of TC2DR and up counter. The minimum input pulse width of TC2 pin is shown in Table 9-2. Two or more machine cycles are required for both the "H" and "L" levels of the pulse width.
Example :Sets the event counter mode and generates an INTTC2 interrupt 640 counts later.
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC2CR), 00011100B (TC2CR), 00111100B (EIRE). 6 (TC2DR), 640 ; Sets TC2DR ; IMF= "0" ;Enables INTTC2 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; TC2 source vclock / mode select ; Starts TC2
Table 9-2 Timer/Counter 2 External Input Clock Pulse Width
Minimum Input Pulse Width [s] NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode "H" width "L" width 23/fc 23/fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode 23/fs 23/fs
Timer start TC2 pin input
Counter
0
1
2
3 Match detect
n
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC2DR
n
INTTC2 interrupt
Figure 9-3 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart 9.3.3 Window mode
In this mode, counting up performed on the rising edge of an internal clock during TC2 external pin input (Window pulse) is "H" level. The contents of TC2DR are compared with the contents of up counter. If a match found, an INTTC2 interrupt is generated, and the up-counter is cleared. The maximum applied frequency (TC2 input) must be considerably slower than the selected internal clock by the TC2CR.
Note:It is not available window mode in the SLOW/SLEEP mode. Therefore, at the window mode in NORMAL mode, the timer should be halted by setting TC2CR to "0" before the SLOW/SLEEP mode is entered.
Page 97
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Example :Generates an interrupt, inputting "H" level pulse width of 120 ms or more. (at fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR = "0" )
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC2CR), 00000101B (TC2CR), 00100101B (EIRE). 6 (TC2DR), 00EAH ; Sets TC2DR (120 ms 213/fc = 00EAH) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC2 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; TC2sorce clock / mode select ; Starts TC2
Timer start
TC2 pin input
Internal clock Counter TC2DR Match detect INTTC2 interrupt Counter clear
1 2 n 0 1 2 3
Figure 9-4 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 98
TMP86CM49NG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC4 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC4 pin TC4M TC4S TFF4
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F4
PDO4/PWM4/ PPG4 pin
TC4CK TC4CR TTREG4 PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF4
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC3 pin TC3M TC3S TFF3
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC3 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F3
PDO3/PWM3/ pin
TC3CK TC3CR TTREG3 PWREG3
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF3
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 10-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 3, 4
Page 99
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG3, PWREG3). TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3 (0014H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG3 (0018H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR (0027H) 7 TFF3 6 5 TC3CK 4 3 TC3S 2 1 TC3M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF3
Time F/F3 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC3CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC3S TC3 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC3M TC3M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC4M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR, where TC3M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR and TC4CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2.
Page 100
TMP86CM49NG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 101
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG4 and PWREG4). TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4 (0015H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG4 (0019H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR (0028H) 7 TFF4 6 5 TC4CK 4 3 TC4S 2 1 TC4M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF4
Timer F/F4 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC4 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC4CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC4S TC4 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC4M TC4M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings. To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC3 overflow signal regardless of the TC4CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR must be set to 011.
Page 102
TMP86CM49NG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103.
Table 10-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 10-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 103
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
Table 10-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 256 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 2 (PWREG4, 3) 65534 1 (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3) Register Value
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 104
TMP86CM49NG
10.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
10.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 10-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Maximum Time Setting
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC4CR), 00010000B (TC4CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC4. (EIRH). 1 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG4), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 105
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
TC4CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG4
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 10-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 10.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR TC4 pin input
Counter
TTREG4
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 10.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 106
TMP86CM49NG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG4), 3DH (TC4CR), 00010001B (TC4CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 107
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 10-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 108
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG4
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
Set F/F
PDO4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
10.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 10-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 109
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG4
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 10-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Page 110
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
n
p
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
10.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 10-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC3CR), 13H :Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRH). 1 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG3), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC4CR), 04H (TC4CR), 0CH
TC4CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG3 (Lower byte) TTREG4 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 10-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 111
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
10.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/ 2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4 Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
10.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.) Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte (PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG4) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 112
TMP86CM49NG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 10-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2s 8.2 ms 4.1 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 056H (TC4CR), 05EH
Page 113
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG3
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG3
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG4
n
m
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 10-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 114
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
an
cp
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
10.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/ 2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 TTREG4, PWREG3 PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TTREG3), 8002H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 057H (TC4CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 115
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 10-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 116
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG3 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG4 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F4
PPG4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
10.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 3, 4
10.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 10-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRH). 1 (SYSCR2).6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 : Starts TC4 and 3.
CLR RETI : VINTTC4: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 117
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
10.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 10-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRH). 1 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC4 and 3.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC4: DW : PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 118
TMP86CM49NG
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC6 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC6 pin TC6M TC6S TFF6
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F6
PDO6/PWM6/ PPG6 pin
TC6CK TC6CR TTREG6 PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF6
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC5S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC5 pin TC5M TC5S TFF5
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC5 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F5
PDO5/PWM5/ pin
TC5CK TC5CR TTREG5 PWREG5
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF5
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 11-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 5, 6
Page 119
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
11.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG5, PWREG5). TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5 (0016H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG5 (001AH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR (0029H) 7 TFF5 6 5 TC5CK 4 3 TC5S 2 1 TC5M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF5
Time F/F5 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC5CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC5S TC5 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC5M TC5M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC6M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 0), do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 1), TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR, where TC5M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR and TC6CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 11-1 and Table 11-2.
Page 120
TMP86CM49NG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 113. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 121
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG6 and PWREG6). TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6 (0017H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG6 (001BH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR (002AH) 7 TFF6 6 5 TC6CK 4 3 TC6S 2 1 TC6M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF6
Timer F/F6 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC6 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC6CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC6S TC6 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC6M TC6M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings. To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC5 overflow signal regardless of the TC6CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR must be set to 011.
Page 122
TMP86CM49NG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 11-1 and Table 11-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 113.
Table 11-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 11-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 123
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
Table 11-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 256 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 2 (PWREG6, 5) 65534 1 (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5) Register Value
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 124
TMP86CM49NG
11.3 Function
The TimerCounter 5 and 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
11.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 11-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Maximum Time Setting
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter6, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC6CR), 00010000B (TC6CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC6. (EIRE). 2 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG6), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 125
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
TC6CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG6
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 11-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 11.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
TC6CR TC6 pin input
Counter
TTREG6
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 11-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 11.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 126
TMP86CM49NG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG6), 3DH (TC6CR), 00010001B (TC6CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Page 127
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 11-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 128
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG6
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
Set F/F
PDO6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
11.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 5, 6
Table 11-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 129
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG6
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG6
PWREG6
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 11-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Page 130
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
n
p
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
11.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 11-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC5CR), 13H :Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRE). 2 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG5), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC6CR), 04H (TC6CR), 0CH
TC6CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG5 (Lower byte) TTREG6 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 11-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 131
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
11.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC5 pin. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC5 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/ 2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG5), and upper byte (TTREG6) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4 Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
11.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.) Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte (PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG6) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 132
TMP86CM49NG
CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 11-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2s 8.2 ms 4.1 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 056H (TC6CR), 05EH
Page 133
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG5
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG5
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG6
n
m
p
Write to PWREG6
Figure 11-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 134
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
an
cp
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
11.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/ 2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 TTREG6, PWREG5 PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TTREG5), 8002H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 057H (TC6CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 135
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 11-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 136
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG5 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG6 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F6
PPG6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CM49NG
TMP86CM49NG
11.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG6 and 5 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 5, 6
11.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 11-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR SET (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRE). 2 (SYSCR2).6 (TC5CR), 43H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 : Starts TC6 and 5.
CLR RETI : VINTTC6: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 137
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration TMP86CM49NG
11.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 11-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC5CR), 63H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRE). 2 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC6 and 5.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC6: DW : PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 138
TMP86CM49NG
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UART1CR1
Transmit data buffer
TD1BUF
Receive data buffer
RD1BUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD1
INTTXD1
INTRXD1
TXD1
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UART1SR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC3
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UART1CR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 12-1 UART1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 139
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.2 Control TMP86CM49NG
12.2 Control
UART1 is controlled by the UART1 Control Registers (UART1CR1, UART1CR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UART1SR).
UART1 Control Register1
UART1CR1 (0F95H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC3 ( Input INTTC3) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UART1CR1 and UART1CR1 should be set to "0" before UART1CR1 is changed.
UART1 Control Register2
UART1CR2 (0F96H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejection time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UART1CR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UART1CR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART1CR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 140
TMP86CM49NG
UART1 Status Register
UART1SR (0F95H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART1 Receive Data Buffer
RD1BUF (0F97H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART1 Transmit Data Buffer
TD1BUF (0F97H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 141
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86CM49NG
12.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART1, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART1CR1), and parity (Select parity in UART1CR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART1CR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 12-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 12-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 12-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 142
TMP86CM49NG
12.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART1 is set of UART1CR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 12-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC3 is used as the UART1 transfer rate (when UART1CR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC3 source clock [Hz] / TTREG3 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
12.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART1 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART1CR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD1 pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD1 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD1 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD1 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 12-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 143
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86CM49NG
12.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART1CR1.
12.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART1CR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UART1CR1.
12.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
12.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART1CR1 to "1". Read UART1SR to check UART1SR = "1", then write data in TD1BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD1BUF zero-clears UART1SR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD1 pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART1CR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UART1SR is set to "1" and an INTTXD1 interrupt is generated. While UART1CR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UART1CR1 to when send data are written to TD1BUF, the TXD1 pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UART1SR, then write data in TD1BUF. Otherwise, UART1SR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
12.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART1CR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD1 pin, the receive data are transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART1SR is set and an INTRXD1 interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD1BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART1CR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 144
TMP86CM49NG
12.9 Status Flag
12.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UART1SR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-5 Generation of Parity Error 12.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UART1SR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears FERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-6 Generation of Framing Error 12.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD1BUF, overrun error flag UART1SR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD1BUF are not affected. The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
Page 145
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.9 Status Flag TMP86CM49NG
UART1SR
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD1BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART1SR
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART1SR is cleared.
12.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD1BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART1SR to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD1BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears RBFL.
UART1SR
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART1SR is set during the period between reading the UART1SR and reading the RD1BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD1BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD1BUF, read the UART1SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
12.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD1BUF, that is, when data in TD1BUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the TD1BUF is written after reading the UART1SR.
Page 146
TMP86CM49NG
Data write
TD1BUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD1 pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UART1SR After reading UART1SR writing TD1BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 12.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD1BUF (UART1SR = "1"), transmit end flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is started after writing the TD1BUF.
Shift register
TXD1 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TD1BUF
Start
Bit 0
UART1SR
UART1SR
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 147
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.9 Status Flag TMP86CM49NG
Page 148
TMP86CM49NG
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UART2CR1
Transmit data buffer
TD2BUF
Receive data buffer
RD2BUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD2
INTTXD2
INTRXD2
TXD2
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UART2SR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC5
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UART2CR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 13-1 UART2 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 149
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.2 Control TMP86CM49NG
13.2 Control
UART2 is controlled by the UART2 Control Registers (UART2CR1, UART2CR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UART2SR).
UART2 Control Register1
UART2CR1 (0F98H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC5 ( Input INTTC5) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UART2CR1 and UART2CR1 should be set to "0" before UART2CR1 is changed.
UART2 Control Register2
UART2CR2 (0F99H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejection time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UART2CR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UART2CR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART2CR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 150
TMP86CM49NG
UART2 Status Register
UART2SR (0F98H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART2 Receive Data Buffer
RD2BUF (0F9AH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART2 Transmit Data Buffer
TD2BUF (0F9AH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 151
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86CM49NG
13.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART2, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART2CR1), and parity (Select parity in UART2CR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART2CR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 13-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 13-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 13-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 152
TMP86CM49NG
13.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART2 is set of UART2CR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 13-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC5 is used as the UART2 transfer rate (when UART2CR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
13.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART2 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART2CR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD2 pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD2 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD2 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD2 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 13-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 153
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86CM49NG
13.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART2CR1.
13.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART2CR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UART2CR1.
13.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
13.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART2CR1 to "1". Read UART2SR to check UART2SR = "1", then write data in TD2BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD2BUF zero-clears UART2SR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD2 pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART2CR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART2CR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UART2SR is set to "1" and an INTTXD2 interrupt is generated. While UART2CR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UART2CR1 to when send data are written to TD2BUF, the TXD2 pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UART2SR, then write data in TD2BUF. Otherwise, UART2SR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
13.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART2CR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD2 pin, the receive data are transferred to RD2BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RD2BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART2SR is set and an INTRXD2 interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART2CR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD2BUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD2BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART2CR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 154
TMP86CM49NG
13.9 Status Flag
13.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UART2SR is set to "1". The UART2SR is cleared to "0" when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
RXD2 pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UART2SR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UART2SR then RD2BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-5 Generation of Parity Error 13.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART2SR is set to "1". The UART2SR is cleared to "0" when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
RXD2 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UART2SR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UART2SR then RD2BUF clears FERR.
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-6 Generation of Framing Error 13.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD2BUF, overrun error flag UART2SR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD2BUF are not affected. The UART2SR is cleared to "0" when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
Page 155
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86CM49NG
UART2SR
RXD2 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD2BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART2SR
After reading UART2SR then RD2BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART2SR is cleared.
13.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD2BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART2SR to "1". The UART2SR is cleared to "0" when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
RXD2 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD2BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART2SR then RD2BUF clears RBFL.
UART2SR
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART2SR is set during the period between reading the UART2SR and reading the RD2BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD2BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD2BUF, read the UART2SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
13.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD2BUF, that is, when data in TD2BUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART2SR is set to "1". The UART2SR is cleared to "0" when the TD2BUF is written after reading the UART2SR.
Page 156
TMP86CM49NG
Data write
TD2BUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD2 pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UART2SR After reading UART2SR writing TD2BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 13.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD2BUF (UART2SR = "1"), transmit end flag UART2SR is set to "1". The UART2SR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is started after writing the TD2BUF.
Shift register
TXD2 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TD2BUF
Start
Bit 0
UART2SR
UART2SR
INTTXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 157
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86CM49NG
Page 158
TMP86CM49NG
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
The serial interfaces connect to an external device via SI1, SO1, and SCK1 pins. When these pins are used as serial interface, the output latches for each port should be set to "1".
14.1 Configuration
Internal data bus
SIO1CR
SIO1SR
SIO1TDB
Shift clock Control circuit MSB/LSB selection
Shift register on transmitter
Port (Note) Port (Note)
SO1 pin
(Serial data output)
SI1 pin
Shift register on receiver
SIO1RDB
(Serial data input)
To BUS
Port (Note)
SCK1 pin
INTSIO1
interrupt
Internal clock input
(Serial data output)
Note: Set the register of port correctly for the port assigned as serial interface pins. For details, see the description of the input/output port control register.
Figure 14-1 Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
Page 159
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.2 Control TMP86CM49NG
14.2 Control
The SIO is controlled using the serial interface control register (SIO1CR). The operating status of the serial interface can be inspected by reading the status register (SIO1CR). Serial Interface Control Register
SIO1CR (0020H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 SIOM 4 3 SIODIR 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS SIOINH
Specify start/stop of transfer Forcibly stops transfer (Note 1)
0: Stop 1: Start 0: - 1: Forcibly stop (Automatically cleared to "0" after stopping) 00: Transmit mode 01: Receive mode 10: Transmit/receive mode 11: Reserved 0: MSB (Transfer beginning with bit7) 1: LSB (Transfer beginning with bit0) NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 modes TBTCR = "0" 000 001 fc/212 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 fc/23 TBTCR = "1" fs/24 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 fc/23 SLOW/SLEEP mode fs/24 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
SIOM
Selects transfer mode
SIODIR
Selects direction of transfer
R/W
SCK
Selects serial clock
010 011 100 101 110 111
External clock (Input from SCK1 pin)
Note 1: When SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized. Note 2: Transfer mode, direction of transfer and serial clock must be select during the transfer is stopping (when SIO1SR "0"). Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care
Page 160
TMP86CM49NG
Serial Interface Status Register
SIO1SR (0021H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 TXF 4 RXF 3 TXERR 2 RXERR 1 0 (Initial value: 0010 00**)
SIOF SEF TXF RXF
Serial transfer operation status monitor Number of clocks monitor Transmit buffer empty flag Receive buffer full flag
0: Transfer finished 1: Transfer in progress 0: 8 clocks 1: 1 to 7 clocks 0: Data exists in transmit buffer 1: No data exists in transmit buffer 0: No data exists in receive buffer 1: Data exists in receive buffer Read 0: - (No error exist) 1: Transmit buffer under run occurs in an external clock mode Write 0: Clear the flag 1: - (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored) Read 0: - (No error exist) 1: Receive buffer over run occurs in an external clock mode Write 0: Clear the flag 1: - (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
Read only
TXERR
Transfer operation error flag
R/W
RXERR
Receive operation error flag
Note 1: The operation error flag (TXERR and RXERR) are not automatically cleared by stopping transfer with SIO1CR "0". Therefore, set these bits to "0" for clearing these error flag. Or set SIO1CR to "1". Note 2: *: Don't care
Receive buffer register
SIO1RDB (0022H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Transmit buffer register
SIO1TDB (0022H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: **** ****)
Note 1: SIO1TDB is write only register. A bit manipulation should not be performed on the transmit buffer register using a readmodify-write instruction. Note 2: The SIO1TDB should be written after checking SIO1SR "1". When SIO1SR is "0", the writing data can't be transferred to SIO1TDB even if write instruction is executed to SIO1TDB Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 161
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
14.3 Function
14.3.1 Serial clock
14.3.1.1 Clock source
The serial clock can be selected by using SIO1CR. When the serial clock is changed, the writing instruction to SIO1CR should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIO1SR "0") (1) Internal clock Setting the SIO1CR to other than "111B" outputs the clock (shown in " Table 14-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz) ") as serial clock outputs from SCK1 pin. At the before beginning or finishing of a transfer, SCK1 pin is kept in high level. When writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode) data can not follow the serial clock rate, an automatic-wait function is executed to stop the serial clock automatically and hold the next shift operation until reading or writing is completed (shown in " Figure 14-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode) "). The maximum time from releasing the automatic-wait function by reading or writing a data is 1 cycle of the selected serial clock until the serial clock comes out from SCK1 pin.
SIO1CR
Automatically wait
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin SIO1TDB
A
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B
Automatic wait is released by writing SIO1TDB
Figure 14-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode)
Table 14-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode TBTCR = "0" SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 Serial Clock fc/212 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 fc/23 Baud Rate 3.906 kbps 62.5 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps 1.00 Mbps 2.00 Mbps TBTCR = "1" Serial Clock Serial Clock fs/24 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 fc/23 Baud Rate 2048 bps 62.5 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps 1.00 Mbps 2.00 Mbps fs/24 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 2048 bps - - - - - Baud Rate SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
Page 162
TMP86CM49NG
(2)
External clock When an external clock is selected by setting SIO1CR to "111B", the clock via the SCK1 pin from an external source is used as the serial clock. To ensure shift operation, the serial clock pulse width must be 4/fc or more for both "H" and "L" levels.
SCK1 pin
tSCKL
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4/fc
Figure 14-3 External Clock
14.3.1.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit data, and the trailing edge is used to receive data. (1)
Leading edge shift Data is shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK1 pin input/output).
(2)
Trailing edge shift Data is shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK1 pin input/output).
SIO1CR
SCK1 pin
Shift register
01234567
*0123456 Shift out
**012345
***01234
****0123
*****012
******01
*******0
********
SO1 pin
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
(a) Leading edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
SIO1CR
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin Shift register
Bit7 ******** 7*******
Bit6 67******
Bit5 567*****
Bit4 4567****
Bit3 34567***
Bit2
Bit1 234567**
Bit0 1234567* 01234567
(b) Trailing edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
Figure 14-4 Shift Edge
Page 163
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
14.3.2 Transfer bit direction
Transfer data direction can be selected by using SIO1CR. The transfer data direction can't be set individually for transmit and receive operations. When the data direction is changed, the writing instruction to SIO1CR should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIO1CR= "0")
SIOCR
SCK1 pin
SIO1TDB SO1 pin
A Shift out A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
(a) MSB transfer
SIO1CR
SCK1 pin
SIO1TDB SO1 pin
A Shift out A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
(b) LSB transfer
Figure 14-5 Transfer Bit Direction (Example of transmit mode)
14.3.2.1 Transmit mode
(1) MSB transmit mode MSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO1CR to "0", in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7). (2) LSB transmit mode LSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO1CR to "1", in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
14.3.2.2 Receive mode
(1) MSB receive mode MSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO1CR to "0", in which case the data is received sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
Page 164
TMP86CM49NG
(2)
LSB receive mode LSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO1CR to "1", in which case the data is received sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
14.3.2.3 Transmit/receive mode
(1) MSB transmit/receive mode MSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO1CR to "0" in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7) and the data is received sequentially beginning with the most significant (Bit7). (2) LSB transmit/receive mode LSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO1CR to "1", in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0) and the data is received sequentially beginning with the least significant (Bit0).
14.3.3 Transfer modes
Transmit, receive and transmit/receive mode are selected by using SIO1CR.
14.3.3.1 Transmit mode
Transmit mode is selected by writing "00B" to SIO1CR. (1) Starting the transmit operation Transmit mode is selected by setting "00B" to SIO1CR. Serial clock is selected by using SIO1CR. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO1CR. When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO1TDB), SIO1SR is cleared to "0". After SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1SR is set synchronously to "1" the falling edge of
SCK1 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO1 pin with the direction of the bit specified by SIO1CR, synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's falling edge. SIO1SR is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK1 pin and eighth clock falling edge. SIO1SR is set to "1" at the rising edge of pin after the data written to the SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register, then the INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated, synchronizing with the next falling edge on SCK1 pin.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when SIO1CR is set to "1", transfer mode does not start without writing a transmit data to the transmit buffer register (SIO1TDB). Note 2: In internal clock operation, when the SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from SCK1 pin. Note 3: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK1 pin after SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register immediately.
Page 165
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
(2)
During the transmit operation When data is written to SIO1TDB, SIO1SR is cleared to "0". In internal clock operation, in case a next transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB, the serial clock stops to "H" level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the SIO1TDB has been transmitted. Automatic-wait function is released by writing a transmit data to SIO1TDB. Then, transmit operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock. When the next data is written to the SIO1TDB before termination of previous 8-bit data with SIO1SR "1", the next data is continuously transferred after transmission of previous data. In external clock operation, after SIO1SR is set to "1", the transmit data must be written to SIO1TDB before the shift operation of the next data begins. If the transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB, transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. Then, INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after SIO1SR is set to "1".
(3)
Stopping the transmit operation There are two ways for stopping transmits operation. * The way of clearing SIO1CR. When SIO1CR is cleared to "0", transmit operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit operation is finished, SIO1SR is cleared to "0" and SO1 pin is kept in high level. In external clock operation, SIO1CR must be cleared to "0" before SIO1SR is set to "1" by beginning next transfer. * The way of setting SIO1CR. Transmit operation is stopped immediately after SIO1CR is set to "1". In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR SIO1SR SIO1SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SCK1 pin outout
Automatic wait
SO1 pin SIO1SR INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1TDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A
B
C
Writing transmit Writing transmit data A data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 14-6 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
Page 166
TMP86CM49NG
Writing transmit data
SIO1CR
Clearing SIOS
SIO1SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO1SR INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1TDB
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 14-7 Exaple of External Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
SCK1 pin
SIO1SR
SO1 pin
tSODH 4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 14-8 Hold Time of the End of Transmit Mode
(4) Transmit error processing Transmit errors occur on the following situation. * Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO1TDB in external clock operation. If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO1SR is set to "1" immediately after starting shift operation. Synchronizing with the next serial clock falling edge, INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated. If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO1TDB after SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1SR is set to "1" immediately after shift operation is started and then INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated. SIO1 pin is kept in high level when SIO1SR is set to "1". When transmit error occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO1CR to "1". In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 167
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
SIO1CR SIO1SR SIO1SR
SCK1 pin
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SO1 pin SIO1SR SIO1SR INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1TDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
A
B
Unknown
SIO1CR
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Figure 14-9 Example of Transmit Error Processingme
14.3.3.2 Receive mode
The receive mode is selected by writing "01B" to SIO1CR. (1) Starting the receive operation Receive mode is selected by setting "01" to SIO1CR. Serial clock is selected by using SIO1CR. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO1CR. After SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1SR is set synchronously to "1" the falling edge of SCK1 pin. Synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's rising edge, the data is received sequentially from SI1 pin with the direction of the bit specified by SBI1DIR. SIO1SR is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK1 pin and eighth clock falling edge. When 8-bit data is received, the data is transferred to SIO1RDB from shift register. INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated and SIO1SR is set to "1"
Note: In internal clock operation, when the SIO1CR is set to "1", the serial clock is generated from SCK1 pin after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency.
(2)
During the receive operation The SIO1SR is cleared to "0" by reading a data from SIO1RDB. In the internal clock operation, the serial clock stops to "H" level by an automatic-wait function when the all of the 8-bit data has been received. Automatic-wait function is released by reading a received data from SIO1RDB. Then, receive operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock. In external clock operation, after SIO1SR is set to "1", the received data must be read from SIO1RDB, before the next data shift-in operation is finished. Page 168
TMP86CM49NG
If received data is not read out from SIO1RDB receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. Then INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after SIO1SR is set to "1". (3) Stopping the receive operation There are two ways for stopping the receive operation. * The way of clearing SIO1CR. When SIO1CR is cleared to "0", receive operation is stopped after all of the data is finished to receive. When receive operation is finished, SIO1SR is cleared to "0". In external clock operation, SIO1CR must be cleared to "0" before SIO1SR is set to "1" by starting the next shift operation. * The way of setting SIO1CR. Receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO1CR is set to "1". In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR
SIO1SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin
Automatic wait
SI1 pin SIO1SR INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1RDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 14-10 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Receive Mode
Page 169
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Reading received data
SIO1CR SIO1SR
Clearing SIOS
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin SIO1SR INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1RDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 14-11 Example of External Clock and MSB Receive Mode
(4) Receive error processing Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO1RDB and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO1SR is "1". * Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO1RDB at SIO1SR is "1" in an external clock operation. If receive error occurs, set the SIO1CR to "0" for reading the data that received immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO1RDB. Data in shift register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO1RDB again. When SIO1SR is cleared to "0" after reading the received data, SIO1SR is cleared to "0". After clearing SIO1CR to "0", when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK1 pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIO1SR is cleared to "0". If the receive error occurs, set the SIO1CR to "1" for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 170
TMP86CM49NG
SIO1CR SIO1SR SIO1SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin SIO1SR SIO1SR INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1RDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Write a "0" after reading the received data when a receive error occurs.
A
B
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Figure 14-12 Example of Receive Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
14.3.3.3 Transmit/receive mode
The transmit/receive mode are selected by writing "10" to SIO1CR. (1) Starting the transmit/receive operation Transmit/receive mode is selected by writing "10B" to SIO1CR. Serial clock is selected by using SIO1CR. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO1CR. When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO1TDB), SIO1SR is cleared to "0". After SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1SR is set synchronously to the falling edge of
SCK1 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO1 pin with the direction of the bit specified by SIO1CR, synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's falling edge. And receiving operation also starts with the direction of the bit specified by SIO1CR, synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's rising edge. SIO1SR is kept in high level between the first clock falling edge of SCK1 pin and eighth clock falling edge. SIO1SR is set to "1" at the rising edge of SCK1 pin after the data written to the SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register. When 8-bit data has been received, the received data is transferred to SIO1RDB from shift register, then the INTSIO1 interrupt request occurs, synchronizing with setting SIO1SR to "1".
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when the SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from SCK1 pin. Note 2: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK1 pin after SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register immediately. When the rising edge is input from SCK1 pin, receive operation also starts.
Page 171
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
(2)
During the transmit/receive operation When data is written to SIO1TDB, SIO1SR is cleared to "0" and when a data is read from SIO1RDB, SIO1SR is cleared to "0". In internal clock operation, in case of the condition described below, the serial clock stops to "H" level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the data has been transmitted. * Next transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB after reading a received data from SIO1RDB. * Received data is not read from SIO1RDB after writing a next transmit data to SIO1TDB. * Neither SIO1TDB nor SIO1RDB is accessed after transmission. The automatic wait function is released by writing the next transmit data to SIO1TDB after reading the received data from SIO1RDB, or reading the received data from SIO1RDB after writing the next data to SIO1TDB. Then, transmit/receive operation is restarted after maximum 1 cycle of serial clock. In external clock operation, reading the received data from SIO1RDB and writing the next data to SIO1TDB must be finished before the shift operation of the next data begins. If the transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB after SIO1SR is set to "1", transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. When the transmit error occurred, SIO1SR is set to "1". If received data is not read out from SIO1RDB before next shift operation starts after setting SIO1SR to "1", receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. When the receive error has occurred, SIO1SR is set to "1".
(3)
Stopping the transmit/receive operation There are two ways for stopping the transmit/receive operation. * The way of clearing SIO1CR. When SIO1CR is cleared to "0", transmit/receive operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit/receive operation is finished, SIO1SR is cleared to "0" and SO1 pin is kept in high level. In external clock operation, SIO1CR must be cleared to "0" before SIO1SR is set to "1" by beginning next transfer. * The way of setting SIO1CR. Transmit/receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO1CR is set to "1". In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 172
TMP86CM49NG
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR SIO1SR SIO1SR
SCK1 pin output
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Automatic wait
Automatic wait
SO1 pin SI1 pin INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1SR SIO1TDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
A0 D0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
B0 E0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
SIO1SR SIO1RDB
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
D
E
F
Reading received data D
Reading received data E
Reading received data F
Figure 14-13 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 173
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Reading received data Writing transmit data
SIO1CR SIO1SR
Clearing SIOS
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin SI1 pin INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1SR
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO1TDB
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
SIO1SR
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
SIO1RDB
D
E
F
Reading received data D
Reading received data E
Reading received data F
Figure 14-14 Example of External Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
(4) Transmit/receive error processing Transmit/receive errors occur on the following situation. Corrective action is different, which errors occur transmits or receives. (a) Transmit errors Transmit errors occur on the following situation. * Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO1TDB in external clock operation. If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO1SR is set to "1" immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received. If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO1TDB after SIO1CR is set to "1", SIO1SR is set immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received. SO1 pin is kept in high level when SIO1SR is set to "1". When transmit error occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO1CR to "1" after the received data is read from SIO1RDB. In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 174
TMP86CM49NG
SIO1CR SIO1SR SIO1SR
SCK1 pin output
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SO1 pin SI1 pin INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1SR SIO1SR
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO1TDB
A
B
Unknown
Writing transmit data A
SIO1SR
Writing transmit data B
SIO1RDB
D
E
F
Reading received data D
SIO1CR
Reading received data E
Reading received data F
Figure 14-15 Example of Transmit/Receive (Transmit) Error Processing
(b) Receive errors Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO1RDB and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO1SR is "1". * Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO1RDB at SIO1SR is "1" in an external clock operation. If receive error occurs, set the SIO1CR to "0" for reading the data that received immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO1RDB. Data in shift register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO1RDB again. When SIO1SR is cleared to "0" after reading the received data, SIO1SR is cleared to "0". After clearing SIO1CR to "0", when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK1 pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIO1SR is cleared to "0". If the received error occurs, set the SIO1CR to "1" for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIO1CR, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 175
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
SIO1CR SIO1SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin SI1 pin INTSIO1 interrupt request SIO1SR
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO1TDB
A
B
C
Unknown
Writing transmit data A
SIO1SR
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
SIO1SR SIO1RDB
D
E
OOH
Reading received data D
SIO1CR
Reading received data E
Figure 14-16 Example of Transmit/Receive (Receive) Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
SCK1 pin
SIO1SR
SO1 pin
tSODH 4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 14-17 Hold Time of the End of Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 176
TMP86CM49NG
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
The serial interfaces connect to an external device via SI2, SO2, and SCK2 pins. When these pins are used as serial interface, the output latches for each port should be set to "1".
15.1 Configuration
Internal data bus
SIO2CR
SIO2SR
SIO2TDB
Shift clock Control circuit MSB/LSB selection
Shift register on transmitter
Port (Note) Port (Note)
SO2 pin
(Serial data output)
SI2 pin
Shift register on receiver
SIO2RDB
(Serial data input)
To BUS
Port (Note)
SCK2 pin
INTSIO2
interrupt
Internal clock input
(Serial data output)
Note: Set the register of port correctly for the port assigned as serial interface pins. For details, see the description of the input/output port control register.
Figure 15-1 Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
Page 177
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.2 Control TMP86CM49NG
15.2 Control
The SIO is controlled using the serial interface control register (SIO2CR). The operating status of the serial interface can be inspected by reading the status register (SIO2CR). Serial Interface Control Register
SIO2CR (0031H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 SIOM 4 3 SIODIR 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS SIOINH
Specify start/stop of transfer Forcibly stops transfer (Note 1)
0: Stop 1: Start 0: - 1: Forcibly stop (Automatically cleared to "0" after stopping) 00: Transmit mode 01: Receive mode 10: Transmit/receive mode 11: Reserved 0: MSB (Transfer beginning with bit7) 1: LSB (Transfer beginning with bit0) NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 modes TBTCR = "0" 000 001 fc/212 fc/28 fc/2
7
SIOM
Selects transfer mode
SIODIR
Selects direction of transfer
TBTCR = "1" fs/24 fc/28 fc/2
7
SLOW/SLEEP mode fs/24 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
R/W
SCK
Selects serial clock
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/26 fc/2
5
fc/26 fc/2
5
fc/24 fc/2
3
fc/24 fc/2
3
External clock (Input from SCK2 pin)
Note 1: When SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized. Note 2: Transfer mode, direction of transfer and serial clock must be select during the transfer is stopping (when SIO2SR "0"). Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care
Page 178
TMP86CM49NG
Serial Interface Status Register
SIO2SR (0032H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 TXF 4 RXF 3 TXERR 2 RXERR 1 0 (Initial value: 0010 00**)
SIOF SEF TXF RXF
Serial transfer operation status monitor Number of clocks monitor Transmit buffer empty flag Receive buffer full flag
0: Transfer finished 1: Transfer in progress 0: 8 clocks 1: 1 to 7 clocks 0: Data exists in transmit buffer 1: No data exists in transmit buffer 0: No data exists in receive buffer 1: Data exists in receive buffer Read 0: - (No error exist) 1: Transmit buffer under run occurs in an external clock mode Write 0: Clear the flag 1: - (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored) Read 0: - (No error exist) 1: Receive buffer over run occurs in an external clock mode Write 0: Clear the flag 1: - (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
Read only
TXERR
Transfer operation error flag
R/W
RXERR
Receive operation error flag
Note 1: The operation error flag (TXERR and RXERR) are not automatically cleared by stopping transfer with SIO2CR "0". Therefore, set these bits to "0" for clearing these error flag. Or set SIO2CR to "1". Note 2: *: Don't care
Receive buffer register
SIO2RDB (002BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Transmit buffer register
SIO2TDB (002BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: **** ****)
Note 1: SIO2TDB is write only register. A bit manipulation should not be performed on the transmit buffer register using a readmodify-write instruction. Note 2: The SIO2TDB should be written after checking SIO2SR "1". When SIO2SR is "0", the writing data can't be transferred to SIO2TDB even if write instruction is executed to SIO2TDB . Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 179
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
15.3 Function
15.3.1 Serial clock
15.3.1.1 Clock source
The serial clock can be selected by using SIO2CR. When the serial clock is changed, the writing instruction to SIO2CR should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIO2SR "0") (1) Internal clock Setting the SIO2CR to other than "111B" outputs the clock (shown in " Table 15-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz) ") as serial clock outputs from SCK2 pin. At the before beginning or finishing of a transfer, SCK2 pin is kept in high level. When writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode) data can not follow the serial clock rate, an automatic-wait function is executed to stop the serial clock automatically and hold the next shift operation until reading or writing is completed (shown in " Figure 15-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode) "). The maximum time from releasing the automatic-wait function by reading or writing a data is 1 cycle of the selected serial clock until the serial clock comes out from SCK2 pin.
SIO2CR
Automatically wait
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin SIO2TDB
A
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B
Automatic wait is released by writing SIO2TDB
Figure 15-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode)
Table 15-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode TBTCR = "0" SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 Serial Clock fc/212 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 fc/23 Baud Rate 3.906 kbps 62.5 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps 1.00 Mbps 2.00 Mbps TBTCR = "1" Serial Clock Serial Clock fs/24 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 fc/23 Baud Rate 2048 bps 62.5 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps 1.00 Mbps 2.00 Mbps fs/24 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 2048 bps - - - - - Baud Rate SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
Page 180
TMP86CM49NG
(2)
External clock When an external clock is selected by setting SIO2CR to "111B", the clock via the SCK2 pin from an external source is used as the serial clock. To ensure shift operation, the serial clock pulse width must be 4/fc or more for both "H" and "L" levels.
SCK2 pin
tSCKL
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4/fc
Figure 15-3 External Clock
15.3.1.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit data, and the trailing edge is used to receive data. (1)
Leading edge shift Data is shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK2 pin input/output).
(2)
Trailing edge shift Data is shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK2 pin input/output).
SIO2CR
SCK2 pin
Shift register
01234567
*0123456 Shift out
**012345
***01234
****0123
*****012
******01
*******0
********
SO2 pin
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
(a) Leading edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
SIO2CR
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin Shift register
Bit7 ******** 7*******
Bit6 67******
Bit5 567*****
Bit4 4567****
Bit3 34567***
Bit2
Bit1 234567**
Bit0 1234567* 01234567
(b) Trailing edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
Figure 15-4 Shift Edge
Page 181
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
15.3.2 Transfer bit direction
Transfer data direction can be selected by using SIO2CR. The transfer data direction can't be set individually for transmit and receive operations. When the data direction is changed, the writing instruction to SIO2CR should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIO2CR= "0")
SIO2CR
SCK2 pin
SIO2TDB SO2 pin
A Shift out A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
(a) MSB transfer
SIO2CR
SCK2 pin
SIO2TDB SO2 pin
A Shift out A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
(b) LSB transfer
Figure 15-5 Transfer Bit Direction (Example of transmit mode)
15.3.2.1 Transmit mode
(1) MSB transmit mode MSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO2CR to "0", in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7). (2) LSB transmit mode LSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO2CR to "1", in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
15.3.2.2 Receive mode
(1) MSB receive mode MSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO2CR to "0", in which case the data is received sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
Page 182
TMP86CM49NG
(2)
LSB receive mode LSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO2CR to "1", in which case the data is received sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
15.3.2.3 Transmit/receive mode
(1) MSB transmit/receive mode MSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO2CR to "0" in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7) and the data is received sequentially beginning with the most significant (Bit7). (2) LSB transmit/receive mode LSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO2CR to "1", in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0) and the data is received sequentially beginning with the least significant (Bit0).
15.3.3 Transfer modes
Transmit, receive and transmit/receive mode are selected by using SIO2CR.
15.3.3.1 Transmit mode
Transmit mode is selected by writing "00B" to SIO2CR. (1) Starting the transmit operation Transmit mode is selected by setting "00B" to SIO2CR. Serial clock is selected by using SIO2CR. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO2CR. When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO2TDB), SIO2SR is cleared to "0". After SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2SR is set synchronously to "1" the falling edge of
SCK2 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO2 pin with the direction of the bit specified by SIO2CR, synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's falling edge. SIO2SR is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK2 pin and eighth clock falling edge. SIO2SR is set to "1" at the rising edge of pin after the data written to the SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register, then the INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated, synchronizing with the next falling edge on SCK2 pin.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when SIO2CR is set to "1", transfer mode does not start without writing a transmit data to the transmit buffer register (SIO2TDB). Note 2: In internal clock operation, when the SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from SCK2 pin. Note 3: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK2 pin after SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register immediately.
Page 183
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
(2)
During the transmit operation When data is written to SIO2TDB, SIO2SR is cleared to "0". In internal clock operation, in case a next transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB, the serial clock stops to "H" level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the SIO2TDB has been transmitted. Automatic-wait function is released by writing a transmit data to SIO2TDB. Then, transmit operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock. When the next data is written to the SIO2TDB before termination of previous 8-bit data with SIO2SR "1", the next data is continuously transferred after transmission of previous data. In external clock operation, after SIO2SR is set to "1", the transmit data must be written to SIO2TDB before the shift operation of the next data begins. If the transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB, transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. Then, INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after SIO2SR is set to "1".
(3)
Stopping the transmit operation There are two ways for stopping transmits operation. * The way of clearing SIO2CR. When SIO2CR is cleared to "0", transmit operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit operation is finished, SIO2SR is cleared to "0" and SO2 pin is kept in high level. In external clock operation, SIO2CR must be cleared to "0" before SIO2SR is set to "1" by beginning next transfer. * The way of setting SIO2CR. Transmit operation is stopped immediately after SIO2CR is set to "1". In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR SIO2SR SIO2SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SCK2 pin outout
Automatic wait
SO2 pin SIO2SR INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2TDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A
B
C
Writing transmit Writing transmit data A data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 15-6 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
Page 184
TMP86CM49NG
Writing transmit data
SIO2CR
Clearing SIOS
SIO2SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO2SR
SCK2 pin
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO2SR INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2TDB
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 15-7 Exaple of External Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
SCK2 pin
SIO2SR
SO2 pin
tSODH 4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 15-8 Hold Time of the End of Transmit Mode
(4) Transmit error processing Transmit errors occur on the following situation. * Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO2TDB in external clock operation. If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO2SR is set to "1" immediately after starting shift operation. Synchronizing with the next serial clock falling edge, INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated. If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO2TDB after SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2SR is set to "1" immediately after shift operation is started and then INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated. SIO2 pin is kept in high level when SIO2SR is set to "1". When transmit error occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO2CR to "1". In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 185
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
SIO2CR SIO2SR SIO2SR
SCK2 pin
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SO2 pin SIO2SR SIO2SR INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2TDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
A
B
Unknown
SIO2CR
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Figure 15-9 Example of Transmit Error Processingme
15.3.3.2 Receive mode
The receive mode is selected by writing "01B" to SIO2CR. (1) Starting the receive operation Receive mode is selected by setting "01" to SIO2CR. Serial clock is selected by using SIO2CR. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO2CR. After SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2SR is set synchronously to "1" the falling edge of SCK2 pin. Synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's rising edge, the data is received sequentially from SI2 pin with the direction of the bit specified by SBI2DIR. SIO2SR is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK2 pin and eighth clock falling edge. When 8-bit data is received, the data is transferred to SIO2RDB from shift register. INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated and SIO2SR is set to "1"
Note: In internal clock operation, when the SIO2CR is set to "1", the serial clock is generated from SCK2 pin after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency.
(2)
During the receive operation The SIO2SR is cleared to "0" by reading a data from SIO2RDB. In the internal clock operation, the serial clock stops to "H" level by an automatic-wait function when the all of the 8-bit data has been received. Automatic-wait function is released by reading a received data from SIO2RDB. Then, receive operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock. In external clock operation, after SIO2SR is set to "1", the received data must be read from SIO2RDB, before the next data shift-in operation is finished. Page 186
TMP86CM49NG
If received data is not read out from SIO2RDB receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. Then INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after SIO2SR is set to "1". (3) Stopping the receive operation There are two ways for stopping the receive operation. * The way of clearing SIO2CR. When SIO2CR is cleared to "0", receive operation is stopped after all of the data is finished to receive. When receive operation is finished, SIO2SR is cleared to "0". In external clock operation, SIO2CR must be cleared to "0" before SIO2SR is set to "1" by starting the next shift operation. * The way of setting SIO2CR. Receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO2CR is set to "1". In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR
SIO2SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO2SR
SCK2 pin
Automatic wait
SI2 pin SIO2SR INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2RDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 15-10 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Receive Mode
Page 187
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Reading received data
SIO2CR SIO2SR
Clearing SIOS
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO2SR
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin SIO2SR INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2RDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
Figure 15-11 Example of External Clock and MSB Receive Mode
(4) Receive error processing Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO2RDB and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO2SR is "1". * Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO2RDB at SIO2SR is "1" in an external clock operation. If receive error occurs, set the SIO2CR to "0" for reading the data that received immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO2RDB. Data in shift register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO2RDB again. When SIO2SR is cleared to "0" after reading the received data, SIO2SR is cleared to "0". After clearing SIO2CR to "0", when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK2 pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIO2SR is cleared to "0". If the receive error occurs, set the SIO2CR to "1" for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 188
TMP86CM49NG
SIO2CR SIO2SR SIO2SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin SIO2SR SIO2SR INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2RDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Write a "0" after reading the received data when a receive error occurs.
A
B
Writing transmit data A
Writing transmit data B
Figure 15-12 Example of Receive Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
15.3.3.3 Transmit/receive mode
The transmit/receive mode are selected by writing "10" to SIO2CR. (1) Starting the transmit/receive operation Transmit/receive mode is selected by writing "10B" to SIO2CR. Serial clock is selected by using SIO2CR. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO2CR. When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO2TDB), SIO2SR is cleared to "0". After SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2SR is set synchronously to the falling edge of
SCK2 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO2 pin with the direction of the bit specified by SIO2CR, synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's falling edge. And receiving operation also starts with the direction of the bit specified by SIO2CR, synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's rising edge. SIO2SR is kept in high level between the first clock falling edge of SCK2 pin and eighth clock falling edge. SIO2SR is set to "1" at the rising edge of SCK2 pin after the data written to the SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register. When 8-bit data has been received, the received data is transferred to SIO2RDB from shift register, then the INTSIO2 interrupt request occurs, synchronizing with setting SIO2SR to "1".
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when the SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from SCK2 pin. Note 2: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK2 pin after SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register immediately. When the rising edge is input from SCK2 pin, receive operation also starts.
Page 189
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
(2)
During the transmit/receive operation When data is written to SIO2TDB, SIO2SR is cleared to "0" and when a data is read from SIO2RDB, SIO2SR is cleared to "0". In internal clock operation, in case of the condition described below, the serial clock stops to "H" level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the data has been transmitted. * Next transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB after reading a received data from SIO2RDB. * Received data is not read from SIO2RDB after writing a next transmit data to SIO2TDB. * Neither SIO2TDB nor SIO2RDB is accessed after transmission. The automatic wait function is released by writing the next transmit data to SIO2TDB after reading the received data from SIO2RDB, or reading the received data from SIO2RDB after writing the next data to SIO2TDB. Then, transmit/receive operation is restarted after maximum 1 cycle of serial clock. In external clock operation, reading the received data from SIO2RDB and writing the next data to SIO2TDB must be finished before the shift operation of the next data begins. If the transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB after SIO2SR is set to "1", transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. When the transmit error occurred, SIO2SR is set to "1". If received data is not read out from SIO2RDB before next shift operation starts after setting SIO2SR to "1", receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. When the receive error has occurred, SIO2SR is set to "1".
(3)
Stopping the transmit/receive operation There are two ways for stopping the transmit/receive operation. * The way of clearing SIO2CR. When SIO2CR is cleared to "0", transmit/receive operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit/receive operation is finished, SIO2SR is cleared to "0" and SO2 pin is kept in high level. In external clock operation, SIO2CR must be cleared to "0" before SIO2SR is set to "1" by beginning next transfer. * The way of setting SIO2CR. Transmit/receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO2CR is set to "1". In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 190
TMP86CM49NG
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR SIO2SR SIO2SR
SCK2 pin output
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Automatic wait
Automatic wait
SO2 pin SI2 pin INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2SR SIO2TDB
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
A0 D0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
B0 E0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
SIO2SR SIO2RDB
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
D
E
F
Reading received data D
Reading received data E
Reading received data F
Figure 15-13 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 191
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Reading received data Writing transmit data
SIO2CR SIO2SR
Clearing SIOS
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO2SR
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin SI2 pin INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2SR
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO2TDB
A
B
C
Writing transmit data A
SIO2SR
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
SIO2RDB
D
E
F
Reading received data D
Reading received data E
Reading received data F
Figure 15-14 Example of External Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
(4) Transmit/receive error processing Transmit/receive errors occur on the following situation. Corrective action is different, which errors occur transmits or receives. (a) Transmit errors Transmit errors occur on the following situation. * Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO2TDB in external clock operation. If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO2SR is set to "1" immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received. If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO2TDB after SIO2CR is set to "1", SIO2SR is set immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received. SO2 pin is kept in high level when SIO2SR is set to "1". When transmit error occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO2CR to "1" after the received data is read from SIO2RDB. In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 192
TMP86CM49NG
SIO2CR SIO2SR SIO2SR
SCK2 pin output
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SO2 pin SI2 pin INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2SR SIO2SR
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO2TDB
A
B
Unknown
Writing transmit data A
SIO2SR
Writing transmit data B
SIO2RDB
D
E
F
Reading received data D
SIO2CR
Reading received data E
Reading received data F
Figure 15-15 Example of Transmit/Receive (Transmit) Error Processing
(b) Receive errors Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO2RDB and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO2SR is "1". * Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO2RDB at SIO2SR is "1" in an external clock operation. If receive error occurs, set the SIO2CR to "0" for reading the data that received immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO2RDB. Data in shift register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO2RDB again. When SIO2SR is cleared to "0" after reading the received data, SIO2SR is cleared to "0". After clearing SIO2CR to "0", when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK2 pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIO2SR is cleared to "0". If the received error occurs, set the SIO2CR to "1" for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIO2CR, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 193
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
SIO2CR SIO2SR
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
Start shift operation
SIO2SR
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin SI2 pin INTSIO2 interrupt request SIO2SR
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO2TDB
A
B
C
Unknown
Writing transmit data A
SIO2SR
Writing transmit data B
Writing transmit data C
SIO2SR SIO2RDB
D
E
OOH
Reading received data D
SIO2CR
Reading received data E
Figure 15-16 Example of Transmit/Receive (Receive) Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
SCK2 pin
SIO2SR
SO2 pin
tSODH 4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 15-17 Hold Time of the End of Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 194
TMP86CM49NG
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
The TMP86CM49NG has a serial bus interface which employs an I2C bus. The serial interface is connected to an external devices through SDA and SCL. The serial bus interface pins are also used as the port. When used as serial bus interface pins, set the output latches of these pins to "1". When not used as serial bus interface pins, the port is used as a normal I/O port.
Note 1: The serial bus interface can be used only in NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 mode. It can not be used in IDLE0, SLOW1/2 and SLEEP0/1/2 mode. Note 2: The serial bus interface can be used only in the Standard mode of I2C. The fast mode and the high-speed mode can not be used. Note 3: Please refer to the I/O port section about the detail of setting port.
16.1 Configuration
INTSBI interrupt request
SCL fc/4 Divider Transfer control circuit Shift register I2C bus data control Input/ output control
SCL
Noise canceller
I2C bus clock sysn. Control
Noise canceller
SDA
SDA
SBICRB/ SBISRB
I2CAR
SBIDBR
SBICRA/ SBISRA
SBI control register B/ SBI status register B
I C bus address register
2
SBI data buffer register
SBI control register A/ SBI status register A
Figure 16-1 Serial Bus Interface (SBI)
16.2 Control
The following registers are used for control the serial bus interface and monitor the operation status. * Serial bus interface control register A (SBICRA) * Serial bus interface control register B (SBICRB) * Serial bus interface data buffer register (SBIDBR) * I2C bus address register (I2CAR) * Serial bus interface status register A (SBISRA) * Serial bus interface status register B (SBISRB)
16.3 Software Reset
A serial bus interface circuit has a software reset function, when a serial bus interface circuit is locked by an external noise, etc. To reset the serial bus interface circuit, write "10", "01" into the SWRST (Bit1, 0 in SBICRB). And a status of software reset canbe read from SWRMON (Bit0 in SBISRA). Page 195
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.4 The Data Format in the I2C Bus Mode TMP86CM49NG
16.4 The Data Format in the I2C Bus Mode
The data format of the I2C bus is shown below.
(a) Addressing format 8 bits 1 1 to 8 bits Data 1 A C K 1 or more 1 to 8 bits Data 1 A CP K
RA S Slave address / C WK 1 (b) Addressing format (with restart) 8 bits 1
1 to 8 bits Data 1 or more
1
8 bits
1
1 to 8 bits Data 1 or more
1 A CP K
RA S Slave address / C WK 1 (c) Free data format 8 bits S Data 1 S R/W ACK P : Start condition : Direction bit : Acknowledge bit : Stop condition 1 A C K
A RA C S Slave address / C K WK 1
1 to 8 bits Data
1 A C K 1 or more
1 to 8 bits Data
1 A CP K
Figure 16-2 Data Format in of I2C Bus
Page 196
TMP86CM49NG
16.5 I2C Bus Control
The following registers are used to control the serial bus interface and monitor the operation status of the I2C bus. Serial Bus Interface Control Register A
SBICRA (0F90H) 7 6 BC 5 4 ACK 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 *000)
ACK = 0 BC Number of Clock 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Master mode Not generate a clock pulse for an acknowledgement. Generate a clock pulse for an acknowledgement. n 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 At fc = 16 MHz Reserved Reserved Reserved 60.6 kHz 30.8 kHz 15.5 kHz 7.8 kHz Reserved Bits 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ACK = 1 Number of Clock 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Slave mode Not count a clock pulse for an acknowledgement. Count a clock pulse for an acknowledgement. At fc = 8 MHz Reserved Reserved 58.8 kHz 30.3 kHz 15.4 kHz 7.8 kHz 3.9 kHz At fc = 4 MHz 100.0 kHz 55.6 kHz 29.4 kHz 15.2 kHz 7.7 kHz 3.9 kHz 1.9 kHz Write only R/W Bits 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Write only
000: 001: BC Number of transferred bits 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: ACK ACK Acknowledgement mode specification 0: 1: SCK 000: 001: Serial clock (fscl) selection (Output on SCL pin) [fscl = 1/(2n+1/fc + 8/fc)] 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
SCK
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: SBICRA cannot be used with any of read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation, etc. Note 3: Do not set SCK as the frequency that is over 100 kHz.
Serial Bus Interface Data Buffer Register
SBIDBR (0F91H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****) R/W
Note 1: For writing transmitted data, start from the MSB (Bit7). Note 2: The data which was written into SBIDBR can not be read, since a write data buffer and a read buffer are independent in SBIDBR. Therefore, SBIDBR cannot be used with any of read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation, etc. Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 197
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control TMP86CM49NG
I2C bus Address Register
I2CAR (0F92H) 7 6 5 4 Slave address SA6 SA5 SA4 SA3 SA2 SA1 SA0 3 2 1 0 ALS (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SA ALS
Slave address selection Address recognition mode specification 0: 1: Slave address recognition Non slave address recognition Write only
Note 1: I2CAR is write-only register, which cannot be used with any of read-modify-write instruction such as bit manipulation, etc. Note 2: Do not set I2CAR to "00H" to avoid the incorrect response of acknowledgment in slave mode. ( If "00H" is set to I2CAR as the Slave Address and a START Byte "01H" in I2C bus standard is recived, the device detects slave address match.)
Serial Bus Interface Control Register B
SBICRB (0F93H) 7 MST 6 TRX 5 BB 4 PIN 3 SBIM 2 1 SWRST1 0 SWRST0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
MST
Master/slave selection
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 00:
Slave Master Receiver Transmitter Generate a stop condition when MST, TRX and PIN are "1" Generate a start condition when MST, TRX and PIN are "1" - (Can not clear this bit by a software) Cancel interrupt service request Port mode (Serial bus interface output disable) Reserved I2C bus mode Reserved Write only
TRX
Transmitter/receiver selection
BB
Start/stop generation
PIN
Cancel interrupt service request
SBIM
Serial bus interface operating mode selection
01: 10: 11:
SWRST1 SWRST0
Software reset start bit
Software reset starts by first writing "10" and next writing "01"
Note 1: Switch a mode to port after confirming that the bus is free. Note 2: Switch a mode to I2C bus mode after confiming that the port is high level. Note 3: SBICRB has write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation, etc. Note 4: When the SWRST (Bit1, 0 in SBICRB) is written to "10", "01" in I2C bus mode, software reset is occurred. In this case, the SBICRA, I2CAR, SBISRA and SBISRB registers are initialized and the bits of SBICRB except the SBIM (Bit3, 2 in SBICRB) are also initialized.
Serial Bus Interface Status Register A
SBISRA (0F90H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SWRMON (Initial value: **** ***1)
SWRMON
Software reset monitor
0: 1:
During software reset - (Initial value)
Read only
Serial Bus Interface Status Register B
SBISRB (0F93H) 7 MST 6 TRX 5 BB 4 PIN 3 AL 2 AAS 1 AD0 0 LRB (Initial value: 0001 0000)
Page 198
TMP86CM49NG
MST
Master/slave selection status monitor Transmitter/receiver selection status monitor Bus status monitor Interrupt service requests status monitor Arbitration lost detection monitor Slave address match detection monitor "GENERAL CALL" detection monitor Last received bit monitor
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
Slave Master Receiver Transmitter Bus free Bus busy Requesting interrupt service Releasing interrupt service request - Arbitration lost detected Detect slave address match or "GENERAL CALL" Detect "GENERAL CALL" Last receive bit is "0" Last receiv bit is "1" Read only
TRX
BB
PIN
AL
AAS
AD0
LRB
16.5.1 Acknowledgement mode specification
16.5.1.1 Acknowledgment mode (ACK = "1")
To set the device as an acknowledgment mode, the ACK (Bit4 in SBICRA) should be set to "1". When a serial bus interface circuit is a master mode, an additional clock pulse is generated for an acknowledge signal. In a slave mode, a clock is counted for the acknowledge signal. In the master transmitter mode, the SDA pin is released in order to receive an acknowledge signal from the receiver during additional clock pulse cycle. In the master receiver mode, the SDA pin is set to low level generation an acknowledge signal during additional clock pulse cycle. In a slave mode, when a received slave address matches to a slave address which is set to the I2CAR or when a "GENERAL CALL" is received, the SDA pin is set to low level generating an acknowledge signal. After the matching of slave address or the detection of "GENERAL CALL", in the transmitter, the SDA pin is released in order to receive an acknowledge signal from the receiver during additional clock pulse cycle. In a receiver, the SDA pin is set to low level generation an acknowledge signal during additional clock pulse cycle after the matching of slave address or the detection of "GENERAL CALL" The Table 16-1 shows the SCL and SDA pins status in acknowledgment mode. Table 16-1 SCL and SDA Pins Status in Acknowledgement Mode
Mode Pin SCL Master SDA SCL When slave address matches or a general call is detected SDA After matching of slave address or general call Released in order to receive an acknowledge signal. Set to low level generating an acknowledge signal. Transmitter Receiver
An additional clock pulse is generated. Released in order to receive an acknowledge signal. Set to low level generating an acknowledge signal
A clock is counted for the acknowledge signal. - Set to low level generating an acknowledge signal.
Slave
16.5.1.2 Non-acknowledgment mode (ACK = "0")
To set the device as a non-acknowledgement mode, the ACK (Bit4 in SBICRA) should be cleared to "0". Page 199
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control TMP86CM49NG
In the master mode, a clock pulse for an acknowledge signal is not generated. In the slave mode, a clock for a acknowledge signal is not counted.
16.5.2 Number of transfer bits
The BC (Bits7 to 5 in SBICRA) is used to select a number of bits for next transmitting and receiving data. Since the BC is cleared to "000" by a start condition, a slave address and direction bit transmissions are always executed in 8 bits. Other than these, the BC retains a specified value.
16.5.3 Serial clock
16.5.3.1 Clock source
The SCK (Bits2 to 0 in SBICRA) is used to select a maximum transfer frequency output from the SCL pin in the master mode. Four or more machine cycles are required for both high and low levels of pulse width in the external clock which is input from SCL pin.
Note: Since the serial bus interface can not be used as the fast mode and the high-speed mode, do not set SCK as the frequency that is over 100 kHz.
tHIGH
tLOW
1/fscl
SCK (Bits2 to 0 in the SBICRA)
tLOW = 2 /fc n tHIGH = 2 /fc + 8/fc fscl = 1/(tLOW + tHIGH)
n
000 001 010 011 100 101 110
n 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tSCKL
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4 tcyc
Note 1: fc = High-frequency clock Note 2: tcyc = 4/fc (in NORMAL mode, IDLE mode)
Figure 16-3 Clock Source
16.5.3.2 Clock synchronization
In the I2C bus, in order to drive a bus with a wired AND, a master device which pulls down a clock pulse to low will, in the first place, invalidate a clock pulse of another master device which generates a high-level clock pulse. Page 200
TMP86CM49NG
The serial bus interface circuit has a clock synchronization function. This function ensures normal transfer even if there are two or more masters on the same bus. The example explains clock synchronization procedures when two masters simultaneously exist on a bus.
SCL pin (Master 1)
Wait
Count start
SCL pin (Master 2)
Count restart
Count reset
SCL (Bus) a b c
Figure 16-4 Clock Synchronization
As Master 1 pulls down the SCL pin to the low level at point "a", the SCL line of the bus becomes the low level. After detecting this situation, Master 2 resets counting a clock pulse in the high level and sets the SCL pin to the low level. Master 1 finishes counting a clock pulse in the low level at point "b" and sets the SCL pin to the high level. Since Master 2 holds the SCL line of the bus at the low level, Master 1 waits for counting a clock pulse in the high level. After Master 2 sets a clock pulse to the high level at point "c" and detects the SCL line of the bus at the high level, Master 1 starts counting a clock pulse in the high level. Then, the master, which has finished the counting a clock pulse in the high level, pulls down the SCL pin to the low level. The clock pulse on the bus is determined by the master device with the shortest high-level period and the master device with the longest low-level period from among those master devices connected to the bus.
16.5.4 Slave address and address recognition mode specification
When the serial bus interface circuit is used with an addressing format to recognize the slave address, clear the ALS (Bit0 in I2CAR) to "0", and set the SA (Bits7 to 1 in I2CAR) to the slave address. When the serial bus interface circuit is used with a free data format not to recognize the slave address, set the ALS to "1". With a free data format, the slave address and the direction bit are not recognized, and they are processed as data from immediately after start condition.
16.5.5 Master/slave selection
To set a master device, the MST (Bit7 in SBICRB) should be set to "1". To set a slave device, the MST should be cleared to "0". When a stop condition on the bus or an arbitration lost is detected, the MST is cleared to "0" by the hardware.
16.5.6 Transmitter/receiver selection
To set the device as a transmitter, the TRX (Bit6 in SBICRB) should be set to "1". To set the device as a receiver, the TRX should be cleared to "0". When data with an addressing format is transferred in the slave mode, the TRX is set to "1" by a hardware if the direction bit (R/W) sent from the master device is "1", and is cleared to "0" by a hardware if the bit is "0". In the master mode, after an acknowledge signal is returned from the slave device, the TRX is cleared to "0" by a hardware if a transmitted direction bit is "1", and is set to "1" by a hardware if it is "0". When an acknowledge signal is not returned, the current condition is maintained.
Page 201
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control TMP86CM49NG
When a stop condition on the bus or an arbitration lost is detected, the TRX is cleared to "0" by the hardware. " Table 16-2 TRX changing conditions in each mode " shows TRX changing conditions in each mode and TRX value after changing Table 16-2 TRX changing conditions in each mode
Mode Slave Mode Master Mode Direction Bit "0" "1" "0" ACK signal is returned "1" "0" Conditions A received slave address is the same value set to I2CAR TRX after Changing "0" "1" "1"
When a serial bus interface circuit operates in the free data format, a slave address and a direction bit are not recognized. They are handled as data just after generating a start condition. The TRX is not changed by a hardware.
16.5.7 Start/stop condition generation
When the BB (Bit5 in SBISRB) is "0", a slave address and a direction bit which are set to the SBIDBR are output on a bus after generating a start condition by writing "1" to the MST, TRX, BB and PIN. It is necessary to set ACK to "1" beforehand.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA pin
A6
Start condition
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
R/W
Acknowledge signal
Slave address and the direction bit
Figure 16-5 Start Condition Generation and Slave Address Generation
When the BB is "1", sequence of generating a stop condition is started by writing "1" to the MST, TRX and PIN, and "0" to the BB. Do not modify the contents of MST, TRX, BB and PIN until a stop condition is generated on a bus. When a stop condition is generated and the SCL line on a bus is pulled-down to low level by another device, a stop condition is generated after releasing the SCL line.
SCL pin
SDA pin
Stop condition
Figure 16-6 Stop Condition Generation
The bus condition can be indicated by reading the contents of the BB (Bit5 in SBISRB). The BB is set to "1" when a start condition on a bus is detected (Bus Busy State) and is cleared to "0" when a stop condition is detected (Bus Free State).
16.5.8 Interrupt service request and cancel
When a serial bus interface circuit is in the master mode and transferring a number of clocks set by the BC and the ACK is complete, a serial bus interface interrupt request (INTSBI) is generated. Page 202
TMP86CM49NG
In the slave mode, the conditions of generating INTSBI interrupt request are follows: * At the end of acknowledge signal when the received slave address matches to the value set by the I2CAR * At the end of acknowledge signal when a "GENERAL CALL" is received * At the end of transferring or receiving after matching of slave address or receiving of "GENERAL CALL" When a serial bus interface interrupt request occurs, the PIN (Bit4 in SBISRB) is cleared to "0". During the time that the PIN is "0", the SCL pin is pulled-down to low level. Either writing data to SBIDBR or reading data from the SBIDBR sets the PIN to "1". The time from the PIN being set to "1" until the SCL pin is released takes tLOW. Although the PIN (Bit4 in SBICRB) can be set to "1" by the softrware, the PIN can not be cleared to "0" by the softrware.
Note:When the arbitration lost occurs, if the slave address sent from the other master devices is not match, the INTSBI interrupt request is generated. But the PIN is not cleared.
16.5.9 Setting of I2C bus mode
The SBIM (Bit3 and 2 in SBICRB) is used to set I2C bus mode. Set the SBIM to "10" in order to set I2C bus mode. Before setting of I2C bus mode, confirm serial bus interface pins in a high level, and then, write "10" to SBIM. And switch a port mode after confirming that a bus is free.
16.5.10Arbitration lost detection monitor
Since more than one master device can exist simultaneously on a bus, a bus arbitration procedure is implemented in order to guarantee the contents of transferred data. Data on the SDA line is used for bus arbitration of the I2C bus. The following shows an example of a bus arbitration procedure when two master devices exist simultaneously on a bus. Master 1 and Master 2 output the same data until point "a". After that, when Master 1 outputs "1" and Master 2 outputs "0", since the SDA line of a bus is wired AND, the SDA line is pulled-down to the low level by Master 2. When the SCL line of a bus is pulled-up at point "b", the slave device reads data on the SDA line, that is data in Master 2. Data transmitted from Master 1 becomes invalid. The state in Master 1 is called "arbitration lost". A master device which loses arbitration releases the SDA pin and the SCL pin in order not to effect data transmitted from other masters with arbitration. When more than one master sends the same data at the first word, arbitration occurs continuously after the second word.
SCL (Bus)
SDA pin (Master 1)
SDA pin becomes "1" after losing arbitration.
SDA pin (Master 2)
SDA (Bus) a b
Figure 16-7 Arbitration Lost
The serial bus interface circuit compares levels of a SDA line of a bus with its SDA pin at the rising edge of the SCL line. If the levels are unmatched, arbitration is lost and the AL (Bit3 in SBISRB) is set to "1". Page 203
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control TMP86CM49NG
When the AL is set to "1", the MST and TRX are cleared to "0" and the mode is switched to a slave receiver mode. Thus, the serial bus interface circuit stops output of clock pulses during data transfer after the AL is set to "1". The AL is cleared to "0" by writing data to the SBIDBR, reading data from the SBIDBR or writing data to the SBICRB.
SCL pin Master A SDA pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
D7A D6A D5A D4A D3A D2A D1A D0A
D7A' D6A' D5A'
SCL pin Master B SDA pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Stop clock output D7B D6B Releasing SDA pin and SCL pin to high level as losing arbitration.
AL
MST
TRX
Accessed to SBIDBR or SBICRB
INTSBI
Figure 16-8 Example of when a Serial Bus Interface Circuit is a Master B 16.5.11Slave address match detection monitor
In the slave mode, the AAS (Bit2 in SBISRB) is set to "1" when the received data is "GENERAL CALL" or the received data matches the slave address setting by I2CAR with an address recognition mode (ALS = 0). When a serial bus interface circuit operates in the free data format (ALS = 1), the AAS is set to "1" after receiving the first 1-word of data. The AAS is cleared to "0" by writing data to the SBIDBR or reading data from the SBIDBR.
16.5.12GENERAL CALL detection monitor
The AD0 (Bit1 in SBISRB) is set to "1" when all 8-bit received data is "0" immediately after a start condition in a slave mode. The AD0 is cleared to "0" when a start or stop condition is detected on a bus.
16.5.13Last received bit monitor
The SDA line value stored at the rising edge of the SCL line is set to the LRB (Bit0 in SBISRB). In the acknowledge mode, immediately after an INTSBI interrupt request is generated, an acknowledge signal is read by reading the contents of the LRB.
Page 204
TMP86CM49NG
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus
16.6.1 Device initialization
For initialization of device, set the ACK in SBICRA to "1" and the BC to "000". Specify the data length to 8 bits to count clocks for an acknowledge signal. Set a transfer frequency to the SCK in SBICRA. Next, set the slave address to the SA in I2CAR and clear the ALS to "0" to set an addressing format. After confirming that the serial bus interface pin is high level, for specifying the default setting to a slave receiver mode, clear "0" to the MST, TRX and BB in SBICRB, set "1" to the PIN, "10" to the SBIM, and "00" to bits SWRST1 and SWRST0.
Note:The initialization of a serial bus interface circuit must be complete within the time from all devices which are connected to a bus have initialized to and device does not generate a start condition. If not, the data can not be received correctly because the other device starts transferring before an end of the initialization of a serial bus interface circuit.
16.6.2 Start condition and slave address generation
Confirm a bus free status (BB = 0). Set the ACK to "1" and specify a slave address and a direction bit to be transmitted to the SBIDBR. By writing "1" to the MST, TRX, BB and PIN, the start condition is generated on a bus and then, the slave address and the direction bit which are set to the SBIDBR are output. The time from generating the START condition until the falling SCL pin takes tLOW. An INTSBI interrupt request occurs at the 9th falling edge of a SCL clock cycle, and the PIN is cleared to "0". The SCL pin is pulled-down to the low level while the PIN is "0". When an interrupt request occurs, the TRX changes by the hardware according to the direction bit only when an acknowledge signal is returned from the slave device.
Note 1: Do not write a slave address to be output to the SBIDBR while data is transferred. If data is written to the SBIDBR, data to been outputting may be destroyed. Note 2: The bus free must be confirmed by software within 98.0 s (The shortest transmitting time according to the I2C bus standard) after setting of the slave address to be output. Only when the bus free is confirmed, set "1" to the MST, TRX, BB, and PIN to generate the start conditions. If the writing of slave address and setting of MST, TRX, BB and PIN doesn't finish within 98.0 s, the other masters may start the transferring and the slave address data written in SBIDBR may be broken.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA pin
A6
Start condition
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
R/W
Acknowledge signal from a slave device
Slave address + Direction bit
PIN INTSBI interrupt request
Figure 16-9 Start Condition Generation and Slave Address Transfer 16.6.3 1-word data transfer
Check the MST by the INTSBI interrupt process after an 1-word data transfer is completed, and determine whether the mode is a master or slave.
Page 205
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus TMP86CM49NG
16.6.3.1 When the MST is "1" (Master mode)
Check the TRX and determine whether the mode is a transmitter or receiver. (1) When the TRX is "1" (Transmitter mode) Test the LRB. When the LRB is "1", a receiver does not request data. Implement the process to generate a stop condition (Described later) and terminate data transfer. When the LRB is "0", the receiver requests next data. When the next transmitted data is other than 8 bits, set the BC, set the ACK to "1", and write the transmitted data to the SBIDBR. After writing the data, the PIN becomes "1", a serial clock pulse is generated for transferring a next 1 word of data from the SCL pin, and then the 1 word of data is transmitted. After the data is transmitted, and an INTSBI interrupt request occurs. The PIN become "0" and the SCL pin is set to low level. If the data to be transferred is more than one word in length, repeat the procedure from the LRB test above.
SCL pin Write to SBIDBR SDA pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PIN INTSBI interrupt request
Acknowledge signal from a receiver
Figure 16-10 Example of when BC = "000", ACK = "1"
(2) When the TRX is "0" (Receiver mode) When the next transmitted data is other than of 8 bits, set the BC again. Set the ACK to "1" and read the received data from the SBIDBR (Reading data is undefined immediately after a slave address is sent). After the data is read, the PIN becomes "1". A serial bus interface circuit outputs a serial clock pulse to the SCL pin to transfer next 1-word of data and sets the SDA pin to "0" at the acknowledge signal timing. An INTSBI interrupt request occurs and the PIN becomes "0". Then a serial bus interface circuit outputs a clock pulse for 1-word of data transfer and the acknowledge signal each time that received data is read from the SBIDBR.
Read SBIDBR SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA pin
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
New D7 Acknowledge signal to a transmitter
PIN
INTSBI interrupt request
Figure 16-11 Example of when BC = "000", ACK = "1"
Page 206
TMP86CM49NG
To make the transmitter terminate transmit, clear the ACK to "0" before reading data which is 1word before the last data to be received. A serial bus interface circuit does not generate a clock pulse for the acknowledge signal by clearing ACK. In the interrupt routine of end of transmission, when the BC is set to "001" and read the data, PIN is set to "1" and generates a clock pulse for a 1-bit data transfer. In this case, since the master device is a receiver, the SDA line on a bus keeps the high-level. The transmitter receives the high-level signal as an ACK signal. The receiver indicates to the transmitter that data transfer is complete. After 1-bit data is received and an interrupt request has occurred, generate the stop condition to terminate data transfer.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
SDA pin PIN
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Acknowledge signal sent to a transmitter
INTSBI interrupt request Clear ACK to "0" before reading SBIDBR Set BC to "001" before reading SBIDBR
Figure 16-12 Termination of Data Transfer in Master Receiver Mode
16.6.3.2 When the MST is "0" (Slave mode)
In the slave mode, a serial bus interface circuit operates either in normal slave mode or in slave mode after losing arbitration. In the slave mode, the conditions of generating INTSBI interrupt request are follows: * At the end of acknowledge signal when the received slave address matches to the value set by the I2CAR * At the end of acknowledge signal when a "GENERAL CALL" is received * At the end of transferring or receiving after matching of slave address or receiving of "GENERAL CALL" A serial bus interface circuit changes to a slave mode if arbitration is lost in the master mode. And an INTSBI interrupt request occurs when word data transfer terminates after losing arbitration. The behavior of INTSBI interrupt request and PIN after losing arbitration are shown in Table 16-3. Table 16-3 The Behavior of INTSBI interrupt request and PIN after Losing Arbitration
When the Arbitration Lost Occurs during Transmission of Slave Address as a Master INTSBI interrupt request When the Arbitration Lost Occurs during Transmission of Data as a Master Transmit Mode
INTSBI interrupt request is generated at the termination of word data.
PIN
When the slave address matches the value set by I2CAR, the PIN is cleared to "0" by generating of INTSBI interrupt request. When the slave address doesn't match the value set by I2CAR, the PIN keeps "1".
PIN keeps "1" (PIN is not cleared to "0").
When an INTSBI interrupt request occurs, the PIN (bit 4 in the SBICRB) is reset, and the SCL pin is set to low level. Either reading or writing from or to the SBIDBR or setting the PIN to "1" releases the SCL pin after taking tLOW.
Page 207
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus TMP86CM49NG
Check the AL (Bit3 in the SBISRB), the TRX (Bit6 in the SBISRB), the AAS (Bit2 in the SBISRB), and the AD0 (Bit1 in the SBISRB) and implements processes according to conditions listed in " Table 164 Operation in the Slave Mode ". Table 16-4 Operation in the Slave Mode
TRX AL AAS AD0 Conditions A serial bus interface circuit loses arbitration when transmitting a slave address. And receives a slave address of which the value of the direction bit sent from another master is "1". In the slave receiver mode, a serial bus interface circuit receives a slave address of which the value of the direction bit sent from the master is "1". Test the LRB. If the LRB is set to "1", set the PIN to "1" since the receiver does not request next data. Then, clear the TRX to "0" to release the bus. If the LRB is set to "0", set the number of bits in 1 word to the BC and write transmitted data to the SBIDBR since the receiver requests next data. Process
1
1
0
Set the number of bits in 1 word to the BC and write transmitted data to the SBIDBR.
1 1
0
0 0 0 In the slave transmitter mode, 1-word data is transmitted.
1 1
1/0
A serial bus interface circuit loses arbitration when transmitting a slave address. And receives a slave address of which the value of the direction bit sent from another master is "0" or receives a "GENERAL CALL". A serial bus interface circuit loses arbitration when transmitting a slave address or data. And terminates transferring word data. In the slave receiver mode, a serial bus interface circuit receives a slave address of which the value of the direction bit sent from the master is "0" or receives "GENERAL CALL". In the slave receiver mode, a serial bus interface circuit terminates receiving of 1word data.
Read the SBIDBR for setting the PIN to "1" (Reading dummy data) or write "1" to the PIN.
0 0
0
A serial bus interface circuit is changed to slave mode. To clear AL to "0", read the SBIDBR or write the data to SBIDBR.
1 0
1/0
Read the SBIDBR for setting the PIN to "1" (Reading dummy data) or write "1" to the PIN.
0
1/0
Set the number of bits in 1-word to the BC and read received data from the SBIDBR.
Note: In the slave mode, if the slave address set in I2CAR is "00H", a START Byte "01H" in I2C bus standard is recived, the device detects slave address match and the TRX is set to "1".
16.6.4 Stop condition generation
When the BB is "1", a sequence of generating a stop condition is started by setting "1" to the MST, TRX and PIN, and clear "0" to the BB. Do not modify the contents of the MST, TRX, BB, PIN until a stop condition is generated on a bus. When a SCL line on a bus is pulled-down by other devices, a serial bus interface circuit generates a stop condition after they release a SCL line. The time from the releasing SCL line until the generating the STOP condition takes tLOW.
Page 208
TMP86CM49NG
"1" "1" "0" "1"
MST TRX BB PIN
Stop condition
SCL pin
SDA pin
PIN
BB (Read)
Figure 16-13 Stop Condition Generation 16.6.5 Restart
Restart is used to change the direction of data transfer between a master device and a slave device during transferring data. The following explains how to restart a serial bus interface circuit. Clear "0" to the MST, TRX and BB and set "1" to the PIN. The SDA pin retains the high-level and the SCL pin is released. Since a stop condition is not generated on a bus, a bus is assumed to be in a busy state from other devices. Test the BB until it becomes "0" to check that the SCL pin of a serial bus interface circuit is released. Test the LRB until it becomes "1" to check that the SCL line on a bus is not pulled-down to the low level by other devices. After confirming that a bus stays in a free state, generate a start condition with procedure " 16.6.2 Start condition and slave address generation ". In order to meet setup time when restarting, take at least 4.7 s of waiting time by software from the time of restarting to confirm that a bus is free until the time to generate a start condition.
Note:When the master is in the receiver mode, it is necessary to stop the data transmission from the slave devcie before the STOP condtion is generated. To stop the transmission, the master device make the slave device receiving a negative acknowledge. Therefore, the LRB is "1" before generating the Restart and it can not be confirmed that SCL line is not pulled-down by other devices. Please confirm the SCL line state by reading the port.
"0" "0" "0" "1" SCL (Bus)
MST TRX BB PIN
"1" "1" "1" "1"
MST TRX BB PIN
4.7s (Min)
Start condition
SCL pin
SDA pin
LRB
BB
PIN
Figure 16-14 Timing Diagram when Restarting
Page 209
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus TMP86CM49NG
Page 210
TMP86CM49NG
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86CM49NG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
17.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 17-1. It consists of control register ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value register ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF VSS
R/2
AVDD
R Reference voltage
R/2
Analog input multiplexer
AIN0
Sample hold circuit
A
Y 10 Analog comparator
AIN15
n S EN IREFON 4 SAIN ADRS AINDS
Successive approximate circuit Shift clock Control circuit 2 AMD 3 ACK ADCCR2 8 ADCDR1 2 INTADC
EOCF ADBF
ADCCR1
ADCDR2
AD converter control register 1, 2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 17-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 211
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.2 Register configuration TMP86CM49NG
17.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers: 1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating. 2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder resistor network). 3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) This register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the AD converter. 4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter. AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1 (001CH) 7 ADRS 6 AMD 5 4 AINDS 3 2 SAIN 1 0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
ADRS
AD conversion start
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
AD conversion start AD operation disable Software start mode Reserved Repeat mode Analog input enable Analog input disable AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 AIN4 AIN5 AIN6 AIN7 AIN8 AIN9 AIN10 AIN11 AIN12 AIN13 AIN14 AIN15
AMD
AD operating mode
AINDS
Analog input control
R/W
SAIN
Analog input channel select
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDR2 = "0"). Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCR1 should be set to "1". Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change. Note 4: The ADCCR1 is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1 newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1 newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Page 212
TMP86CM49NG
AD Converter Control Register 2
ADCCR2 (001DH) 7 6 5 IREFON 4 "1" 3 2 ACK 1 0 "0" (Initial value: **0* 000*)
IREFON
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection control
0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Connected only during AD conversion Always connected 39/fc Reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc Reserved
ACK
AD conversion time select (Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCR2 to "1". Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data. Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Table 17-1 ACK setting and Conversion time
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Conversion time 39/fc 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 19.5 s Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Reserved 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 10 MHz 5 MHz 2.5 MHz 15.6 s
Note 1: Setting for "-" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Analog reference voltage (VAREF) .
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V VAREF = 2.7 to 5.5 V VAREF = 1.8 to 5.5 V 15.6 s and more 31.2 s and more 124.8 s and more
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDR1 (001FH) 7 AD09 6 AD08 5 AD07 4 AD06 3 AD05 2 AD04 1 AD03 0 AD02 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDR2 (001EH) 7 AD01 6 AD00 5 EOCF 4 ADBF 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
Page 213
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.2 Register configuration TMP86CM49NG
EOCF ADBF
AD conversion end flag AD conversion BUSY flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Before or during conversion Conversion completed During stop of AD conversion During AD conversion
Read only
Note 1: The ADCDR2 is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1. Note 2: The ADCDR2 is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is cleared upon entering STOP mode or SLOW mode . Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 214
TMP86CM49NG
17.3 Function
17.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCR1 to "01" (software start mode), set ADCCR1 to "1". AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is thereby started. After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1 newly again (Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start ADCCR1 AD conversion start
ADCDR2
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
ADCDR2
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
ADCDR2
Figure 17-2 Software Start Mode 17.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is performed repeatedly. In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCR1 to "1" after setting ADCCR1 to "11" (Repeat mode). After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD conversion, set ADCCR1 to "00" (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 215
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
ADCCR1 AD conversion start ADCCR1
"11"
"00"
Conversion operation
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended. Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDR1,ADCDR2
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
ADCDR2 EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 ADCDR2 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
Conversion result read Conversion result read
Figure 17-3 Repeat Mode 17.3.3 Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows: * Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN). * Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS). * Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows: * Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 17-1 and AD converter control register 2. * Choose IREFON for DA converter control. 3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) to "1". If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately. 4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to "1", upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated. 5. EOCF is cleared to "0" by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is completed.
Page 216
TMP86CM49NG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 19.5 s at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH nd store the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
: (port setting) : LD LD : : (ADCCR1) , 00100011B (ADCCR2) , 11011000B ;Set port register approrriately before setting AD converter registers. (Refer to section I/O port in details) ; Select AIN3 ;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode
SET SLOOP : TEST JRS
(ADCCR1) . 7 (ADCDR2) . 5 T, SLOOP
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start) ; EOCF= 1 ?
LD LD LD LD
A , (ADCDR2) (9EH) , A A , (ADCDR1) (9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
17.4 STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value). Also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode).) When restored from standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion. Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage.
Page 217
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result TMP86CM49NG
17.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 17-4.
3FFH 3FEH 3FDH AD conversion result 03H 02H 01H
VAREF VSS
0
1
2
3 1021 1022 1023 1024 Analog input voltage
1024
Figure 17-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 218
TMP86CM49NG
17.6 Precautions about AD Converter
17.6.1 Restrictions for AD Conversion interrupt (INTADC) usage
When an AD interrupt is used, it may not be processed depending on program composition. For example, if an INTADC interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch IL15 (INTADC) is being accepted, the INTADC interrupt latch may be cleared without the INTADC interrupt being processed. The completion of AD conversion can be detected by the following methods: (1) Method not using the AD conversion end interrupt Whether or not AD conversion is completed can be detected by monitoring the AD conversion end flag (EOCF) by software. This can be done by polling EOCF or monitoring EOCF at regular intervals after start of AD conversion. (2) Method for detecting AD conversion end while a lower-priority interrupt is being processed While an interrupt with priority lower than INTADC is being processed, check the AD conversion end flag (EOCF) and interrupt latch IL15. If IL15 = 0 and EOCF = 1, call the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine with consideration given to PUSH/POP operations. At this time, if an interrupt request with priority higher than INTADC has been set, the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine will be executed first against the specified priority. If necessary, we recommend that the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine be called after checking whether or not an interrupt request with priority higher than INTADC has been set.
17.6.2 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN15) are used at voltages within VAREF to VSS. If any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
17.6.3 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN15) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
17.6.4 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 17-5. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance AINi Permissible signal source impedance
5 k (max) 5 k (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 12 pF (typ.)
DA converter
Note) i = 15 to 0
Figure 17-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 219
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.6 Precautions about AD Converter TMP86CM49NG
Page 220
TMP86CM49NG
18. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86CM49NG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP0 to STOP3) pins. When the STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used. In details, refer to the following section " 18.2 Control ".
18.1 Configuration
INT5 STOP mode release signal (1: Release) STOP
STOP0 STOP1 STOP2 STOP3
STOPCR (0F9FH)
Figure 18-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
18.2 Control
STOP0 to STOP3 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to input mode by I/O port register beforehand. Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR (0F9FH) 7 STOP3 6 STOP2 5 STOP1 4 STOP0 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP3 STOP2 STOP1 STOP0
0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable
STOP3 STOP2 STOP1 STOP0
STOP mode released by STOP3 STOP mode released by STOP2 STOP mode released by STOP1 STOP mode released by STOP0
Write only Write only Write only Write only
18.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the "L" level on STOP0 to STOP3 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 221
18. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
18.3 Function TMP86CM49NG
Also, each level of the STOP0 to STOP3 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register, check all STOP0 to STOP3 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is started (Note2,3).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1 = "0"), inhibit input from STOP0 to STOP3 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP0 to STOP3 pins that are available input during STOP mode. Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP0 to STOP3 pins input which is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (Warm up). Note 3: The input circuit of Key-on Wakeup input and Port input is separated, so each input voltage threshold value is different. Therefore, a value comes from port input before STOP mode start may be different from a value which is detected by Key-on Wakeup input (Figure 18-2). Note 4: STOP pin doesn't have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function. Note 5: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may generate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD conversion input (analog voltage input). Note 6: When the STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure 18-3).
Port input Key-on wakeup input
External pin
Figure 18-2 Key-on Wakeup Input and Port Input
a) STOP
b) In case of STOP0 to STOP3
STOP pin STOP mode Release STOP mode
STOP pin "L"
STOP0 pin
STOP mode
Release STOP mode
Figure 18-3 Priority of STOP pin and STOP0 to STOP3 pins
Table 18-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge) Pin name SYSCR1="1" (Note2) "H" level "L" level "L" level "L" level "L" level SYSCR1="0" Rising edge Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1)
STOP
STOP0 STOP1 STOP2 STOP3
Page 222
TMP86CM49NG
19. Input/Output Circuit
19.1 Control pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86CM49NG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Osc.enable
fc VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (high frequency) Rf = 1.2 M (typ.) RO =0.5 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN
XOUT
Osc.enable
XTEN fs VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (Low frequency) Rf = 6 M (typ.) RO = 220 k (typ.)
XTIN XTOUT
Input Output
VDD
Rf
XTIN
XTOUT VDD R RIN
Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor RIN = 220 k (typ.) R = 100 (typ.)
RESET
Input
Address-trap-reset Watchdog-timer-reset System-clock-reset
VDD
Pull-down resistor TEST Input
R RIN
RIN = 70 k (typ.) R = 100 (typ.)
Page 223
19. Input/Output Circuit
19.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86CM49NG
19.2 Input/Output Ports
Port I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P1 I/O
VDD
Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input
Disable
R
R = 100 (typ.)
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
Sink open drain output High current output
P3
I/O
Data output Output latch input Pin input R
R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input
P2
I/O
Data output Output latch input Pin input R
R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z"
Sink open drain output High current output Hysteresis input
P5
I/O
Data output Output latch input Pin input R
R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" VDD P-ch control Data output
P0 P4 I/O Sink open drain output or C-MOS output Hysteresis input
Output latch input Disable Pin input (Control input) R
R = 100 (typ.)
Page 224
TMP86CM49NG
Port
I/O
Input/Output Circuitry
Remarks
Initial "High-Z" Analog input Data output
P67 P66 P65 P64
VDD
I/O
Output latch input Disable Pin input Key-on Wakeup R
Tri-state I/O R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" Analog input
P63 P62 P61 P60 P7
VDD
Tri-state I/O
Data output
I/O
Output latch input Disable Pin input R
R = 100 (typ.)
Page 225
19. Input/Output Circuit
19.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86CM49NG
Page 226
TMP86CM49NG
20. Electrical Characteristics
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant. Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Symbol VDD VIN VOUT1 IOUT1 Output current (Per 1 pin) IOUT2 IOUT3 Output current (Total) Power dissipation [Topr = 85 C] Soldering temperature (time) Storage temperature Operating temperature IOUT1 IOUT2 PD Tsld Tstg Topr P0, P1, P4, P6, P7 ports P0, P1, P2, P4, P6, P7 ports P3, P5 ports P0, P1, P2, P4, P6, P7 ports P3, P5 ports Pins Ratings -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -1.8 3.2 30 60 80 250 260 (10 s) -55 to 125 -40 to 85 C mW mA Unit V V V
Page 227
20. Electrical Characteristics
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings TMP86CM49NG
20.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
The recommended operating conditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that the device will operate as specified. If the device is used under operating conditions other than the recommended operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified AC/DC values etc.), malfunction may occur. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the recommended operating conditions for the device are always adhered to.
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Pins fc = 16 MHz fc = 8 MHz Supply voltage VDD fc = 4.2 MHz fs = 32.768 KHz STOP mode VIH1 Input high level VIH2 VIH3 VIL1 Input low level VIL2 VIL3 Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V Clock frequency fc XIN, XOUT VDD = 2.7 to 5.5V VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V fs XTIN, XTOUT 30.0 1.0 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 VDD x 0.90 VDD x 0.30 0 VDD x 0.25 VDD x 0.10 4.2 8.0 16.0 34.0 kHz MHz VDD Ratings NORMAL1, 2 modes IDLE0, 1, 2 modes NORMAL1, 2 modes IDLE0, 1, 2 modes NORMAL1, 2 modes IDLE0, 1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes 1.8 Min 4.5 2.7 5.5 Max Unit
V
Page 228
TMP86CM49NG
20.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Hysteresis voltage Symbol VHS IIN1 Input current IIN2 IIN3 Input resistance RIN1 RIN2 ILO1 ILO2 VOH VOL IOL Pins Hysteresis input TEST Sink open drain, tri-state port
RESET, STOP
Condition
Min -
Typ. 0.9
Max -
Unit V
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
-
-
2
A
TEST pull-down
RESET pull-up
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V fc = 16 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz
- 100 - - 4.1 - - - - -
70 220 - - - - 20 7.5 5.3 8.5 6.1 5.0
- 450 2 2 - 0.4 - 13.0
k
Output leakage current Output high voltage Output low voltage Output low curren Supply current in NORMAL1, 2 modes Supply current in IDLE 0, 1, 2 modes Supply current in SLOW1 mode Supply current in SLEEP1 mode Supply current in SLEEP0 mode Supply current in STOP mode
Sink open drain port Tri-state port Tri-state port Except XOUT, P3, P5 High current port (P3, P5 Port)
A
V
mA
mA 9.0 20.0 15.0 A - 11.0
IDD
VDD = 3.0 V VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V fs = 32.768 kHz -
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
-
0.5
10
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C and VDD = 5 V. Note 2: Input current (IIN1, IIN3): The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: IDD does not include IREF. Note 4: The supply currents of SLOW2 and SLEEP2 modes are equivalent to those of IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 modes.
Page 229
20. Electrical Characteristics
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings TMP86CM49NG
20.4 AD Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Paramete Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit Analog reference voltage range (Note 4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 5.0 V, VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 5.0 V Symbol VAREF AVDD VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 5.5 V VSS = 0.0 V 3.5 VSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 1.0 Typ. - VDD - - 0.6 - - - - - VAREF 1.0 2 2 2 2 LSB mA Max AVDD Unit
V
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit Analog reference voltage range (Note 4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 2.7 V VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 2.7 V Symbol VAREF AVDD VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 4.5 V VSS = 0.0 V 2.5 VSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 1.0 Typ. - VDD - - 0.5 - - - - - VAREF 0.8 2 2 2 2 LSB mA Max AVDD Unit
V
(VSS = 0 V, 2.0 V VDD < 2.7 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) (Note6) (VSS = 0 V, 1.8 V VDD < 2.0 V, Topr = -10 to 85C) (Note6) Parameter Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit Analog reference voltage range (Note 4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 1.8 V VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 1.8 V Symbol VAREF AVDD VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF =2.7 V VSS = 0.0 V 1.8 V VDD < 2.0 V 2.0 V VDD < 2.7 V 1.8 2.0 VSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 0.9 Typ. - VDD - - - 0.3 - - - - - - VAREF 0.5 4 4 4 4 LSB mA V Max AVDD Unit
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quanitization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line. Note 2: Conversion time is defferent in recommended value by power supply voltage. Note 3: The voltage to be input on the AIN input pin must not exceed the range between VAREF and VSS. If a voltage outside this range is input, conversion values will become unstable and conversion values of other channels will also be affected. Note 4: Analog reference voltage range: VAREF = VAREF - VSS Note 5: When AD converter is not used, fix the AVDD and VAREF pin on the VDD level.
Page 230
TMP86CM49NG
Note 6: When AD is used with VDD < 2.0 V, the guaranteed temperature range varies with the operating voltage.
Page 231
20. Electrical Characteristics
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings TMP86CM49NG
20.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 modes Machine cycle time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 16 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.25 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
31.25
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Paramete Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 modes Machine cycle time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 8 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.5 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
62.5
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, 1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Paramete Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 modes Machine cycle time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 4.2 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.95 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
119.05
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
Page 232
TMP86CM49NG
20.6 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT
C1
C2
C1
C2
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: A quartz resonator can be used for high-frequency oscillation only when VDD is 2.7 V or above. If VDD is below 2.7 V, use a ceramic resonator. Note 2: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 3: When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition. Note 4: The product numbers and specifications of the resonators by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. are subject to change. For up-to-date information, please refer to the following URL: http://www.murata.co.jp/
Page 233
20. Electrical Characteristics
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings TMP86CM49NG
20.7 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown below. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows:
Solderability rate until forming 95 %
- When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 234
TMP86CM49NG
21. Package Dimensions
SDIP64-P-750-1.78 Rev 01
Unit: mm
Page 235
21. Package Dimensions
TMP86CM49NG
Page 236
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86CM49NG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X